EML Service Guide

HP Enterprise Modular Library E-Series
Service Guide
HP Part Number: AH062-96015

Published: July 2014
Edition: 10
© Copyright 2005, 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Contents
1 Library overview.........................................................................................9
Available configurations............................................................................................................9
Parts of the library..................................................................................................................12
Base module..........................................................................................................................13
Expansion modules.................................................................................................................15
Tape drive expansion module..............................................................................................16
Card cage expansion module.............................................................................................16
Capacity expansion module................................................................................................17
Controller cards......................................................................................................................17
Library robotics controller....................................................................................................18
Interface Manager card......................................................................................................18
Interface controller ............................................................................................................20
Ports on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller.................................................................20
Ports on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller.................................................................20
Changing the master controller (SIPP master).....................................................................21
Backplane boards..................................................................................................................21
8U base module backplane................................................................................................21
4U base module backplane................................................................................................22
Tape drive expansion module backplane..............................................................................22
Card cage expansion module backplane..............................................................................23
Functional description..............................................................................................................23
Load ports and magazines......................................................................................................24
Tape drives............................................................................................................................24
Switch for the internal network..................................................................................................25
Operator control panel............................................................................................................25
Numbering............................................................................................................................26
Command View TL..................................................................................................................29
Library and Tape Tools............................................................................................................30
2 Using the library......................................................................................31
Powering on the library...........................................................................................................31
Powering off the library...........................................................................................................32
Center-door interlock...............................................................................................................32
Performing an inventory...........................................................................................................32
When the robot is parked...................................................................................................32
When the robot is not parked..............................................................................................33
Attaching barcode labels to tape cartridges...............................................................................34
Setting the write-protect switch..................................................................................................35
Inserting tape cartridges into the load port.................................................................................36
Using the OCP.......................................................................................................................37
OCP icons........................................................................................................................37
Home screen.....................................................................................................................38
OCP tabs and status bar.....................................................................................................38
Timeouts...........................................................................................................................39
OCP functions...................................................................................................................39
Status screen.....................................................................................................................41
Configuration screen..........................................................................................................43
Operations screen..............................................................................................................44
Support screen..................................................................................................................46
Controls and indicators...........................................................................................................46
Library robotics controller....................................................................................................46
Interface Manager card......................................................................................................47
Contents 3
e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller.......................................................................................48
e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller.......................................................................................48
LTO tape drives..................................................................................................................49
Switch for the internal network.............................................................................................50
Library main power switch...................................................................................................51
Power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module............................................52
Power supply in the card cage expansion module..................................................................52
Power distribution unit.........................................................................................................53
Manual operations.................................................................................................................53
Manually parking the robot.................................................................................................53
Manually opening the load port door...................................................................................54
Removing a tape cartridge from a tape drive.........................................................................55
Removing a tape cartridge from the picker assembly...............................................................56
3 Troubleshooting and event reporting...........................................................57
Diagnostic support tools..........................................................................................................57
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................57
Startup problems...............................................................................................................58
OCP problems...................................................................................................................60
Robotics problems..............................................................................................................60
Operating problems...........................................................................................................62
Tape drive problems...........................................................................................................62
Interface Manager card problems........................................................................................63
Interface controller problems...............................................................................................66
LED indicators...............................................................................................................66
Basic troubleshooting.....................................................................................................66
Examining FC port connection...................................................................................67
Examining the interface controller configuration............................................................67
Examining devices....................................................................................................67
Examining the host configuration................................................................................67
Examining HBA device driver information....................................................................67
Examining serial port configuration.............................................................................68
Event reporting.......................................................................................................................68
Library robotics controller events..........................................................................................69
SCSI events.......................................................................................................................70
IFM events........................................................................................................................71
Diagnostic events...............................................................................................................76
Miscellaneous library events................................................................................................90
SNMP events.....................................................................................................................92
Service events....................................................................................................................93
Miscellaneous events..........................................................................................................94
Robot events......................................................................................................................95
Scan events.....................................................................................................................103
Target events...................................................................................................................104
Coordinated motion (CMO) events.....................................................................................105
Tape drive events.............................................................................................................109
Configuration events.........................................................................................................119
Environmental events........................................................................................................120
4 Removing and replacing parts..................................................................121
Tape drive expansion module.................................................................................................121
Tape drive expansion module—AD565A............................................................................122
Required tools—AD565A.............................................................................................122
Installing a tape drive expansion module—AD565A........................................................122
Tape drive expansion module—AD565B.............................................................................124
Required tools—AD565B.............................................................................................124
4 Contents
Installing a tape drive expansion module—AD565B........................................................124
Card cage expansion module................................................................................................128
Capacity expansion module...................................................................................................129
Library robotics controller.......................................................................................................129
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
Removing the library robotics controller...............................................................................130
Replacing the library robotics controller..............................................................................130
Interface Manager card.........................................................................................................131
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001............................................................131
Removing the Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001....................................131
Replacing the Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001....................................133
Interface Manager card 480240-001.................................................................................134
Removing the Interface Manager card480240-001..........................................................134
Replacing the Interface Manager card 480240-001........................................................135
CompactFlash card...............................................................................................................136
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
CompactFlash card 488160-001........................................................................................136
Removing the CompactFlash card 488160-001................................................................136
Replacing the CompactFlash card 488160-001...............................................................137
CompactFlash card 439651-001........................................................................................139
Removing the CompactFlash card 439651-001................................................................140
Replacing the CompactFlash card 439651-001................................................................140
Memory module on the Interface Manager card.......................................................................143
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
Removing the memory module...........................................................................................143
Replacing the memory module...........................................................................................144
e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller.........................................................................................144
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
Removing an e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller.................................................................145
Replacing an e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller.................................................................146
e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller.........................................................................................146
Required tools.................................................................................................................147
Removing an e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller.................................................................147
Replacing an e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller.................................................................148
Power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module..............................................149
Required tools.................................................................................................................150
Removing a power supply from the base module or tape drive expansion module....................150
Replacing a power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module........................151
Power supply in the card cage expansion module ....................................................................151
Required tools.................................................................................................................151
Removing a power supply from the card cage expansion module ..........................................151
Replacing a power supply in the card cage expansion module .............................................152
Fans in the base module .......................................................................................................152
Required tools.................................................................................................................152
Removing the fans from the base module ...........................................................................153
Replacing the fans in the base module ...............................................................................153
Fans in the card cage expansion module ................................................................................154
Required tools.................................................................................................................154
Removing the fans from the card cage expansion module .....................................................154
Replacing the fans in the card cage expansion module ........................................................155
LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive........................................................................................................156
Required tools.................................................................................................................156
Removing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive................................................................................156
Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive................................................................................157
Contents 5
LTO4 and later tape drives.....................................................................................................158
Switch for the internal network................................................................................................159
Required tools.................................................................................................................159
Removing the switch for the internal network........................................................................160
Replacing the switch for the internal network........................................................................163
Robotics unit........................................................................................................................166
Robotics unit 375820-001.................................................................................................167
Required tools 375820-001..........................................................................................167
Removing the robotics unit 375820-001.........................................................................167
Replacing the robotics unit 375820-001.........................................................................169
Robotics unit 459863-001.................................................................................................170
Removing the robotics unit 409863-001.........................................................................171
Replacing the robotics unit 409863-001.........................................................................173
Operator control panel..........................................................................................................176
Required tools.................................................................................................................176
Removing the operator control panel..................................................................................176
Replacing the operator control panel..................................................................................177
Load port door on the base module .......................................................................................177
Load port door on the base module...................................................................................178
Removing the load port door from the base module.........................................................178
Replacing the load port door on the base module...........................................................178
Load port door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module.........................178
Center door on the base module............................................................................................179
Required tools.................................................................................................................179
Removing the center door from the base module..................................................................179
Replacing the center door on the base module....................................................................180
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module.............................181
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 375827-001......182
Required tools 375827-001...........................................................................................182
Removing the center door from a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
375827-001...............................................................................................................182
Replacing the center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
375827-001...............................................................................................................182
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 409868-001.....183
Required tools 409868-001..........................................................................................183
409868-001..............................................................................................................183
409868-001..............................................................................................................183
Center door on the card cage expansion module.....................................................................183
Faceplate on the base module................................................................................................184
Faceplate on the base module 375822-001.........................................................................184
Required tools 375822-001..........................................................................................184
Removing the faceplate from the base module 375822-001..............................................185
Replacing the faceplate on the base module 375822-001.................................................185
Faceplate on the base module 409865-001........................................................................185
Required tools 409865-001..........................................................................................185
Removing the faceplate from the base module 409865-001..............................................185
Replacing the faceplate on the base module 409865-001................................................187
Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module................................188
Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 375823-001.........188
Required tools 375823-001..........................................................................................188
Removing the faceplate from a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
375823-001...............................................................................................................188
6 Contents
Replacing the faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
375823-001...............................................................................................................189
Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 409866-001........189
Required tools 409866-001..........................................................................................189
409866-001..............................................................................................................189
409866-001..............................................................................................................191
Card cage assembly.............................................................................................................192
Card cage assembly 375837-001......................................................................................192
Required tools 375837-001...........................................................................................192
Removing the card cage assembly 375837-001...............................................................192
Replacing the card cage assembly 375837-001..............................................................193
Card cage assembly 409878-001......................................................................................193
Required tools 409878-001..........................................................................................193
Removing the card cage assembly 409878-001..............................................................193
Replacing the card cage assembly 409878-001..............................................................194
Backplane in the 8U base module..........................................................................................195
Backplane in the 8U base module 375834-001...................................................................195
Required tools 375834-001..........................................................................................195
Removing the backplane from the 8U base module 375834-001.......................................196
Replacing the backplane in the 8U base module 375834-001..........................................199
Required tools 409875-001..........................................................................................201
Backplane in the 4U base module..........................................................................................207
Required tools 375835-001..........................................................................................208
Required tools 409876-001..........................................................................................208
Backplane in a tape drive expansion module...........................................................................211
Required tools.................................................................................................................212
Removing the backplane from a tape drive expansion module...............................................212
Replacing the backplane in a tape drive expansion module...................................................214
Interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage expansion module..................215
Required tools.................................................................................................................215
Removing the interconnect board from a tape drive expansion module or card cage expansion
module...........................................................................................................................215
Replacing the interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage expansion
module...........................................................................................................................216
Interconnect board in a capacity expansion module..................................................................216
Required tools.................................................................................................................217
Removing the interconnect board from a capacity expansion module......................................217
Replacing the interconnect board in a capacity expansion module.........................................218
Robotics unit cover................................................................................................................218
Removing the robotics unit cover........................................................................................218
Replacing the robotics unit cover........................................................................................219
4U blank cover....................................................................................................................219
Removing a 4U blank cover..............................................................................................219
Replacing a 4U blank cover..............................................................................................220
Contents 7
Load port magazine.............................................................................................................221
Removing a load port magazine........................................................................................221
Replacing a load port magazine........................................................................................221
Three-slot arrays...................................................................................................................222
Removing a three-slot array...............................................................................................222
Replacing a three-slot array...............................................................................................223
Six-slot arrays.......................................................................................................................223
5 Support and other resources....................................................................226
Contacting HP......................................................................................................................226
Related information...............................................................................................................226
Related documentation.....................................................................................................226
HP websites....................................................................................................................226
HP tape cartridges......................................................................................................227
Product warranties.......................................................................................................227
Subscription services....................................................................................................227
Typographic conventions.......................................................................................................227
Rack stability........................................................................................................................228
A Specifications and characteristics.............................................................229
Library component specifications............................................................................................229
Library environmental specifications........................................................................................230
Acoustics.............................................................................................................................231
Ultrium tape drive comparisons...............................................................................................231
B Codes...................................................................................................232
Operation state codes...........................................................................................................232
Activity codes.......................................................................................................................233
C Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking..........................................................237
Turkey RoHS material content declaration.................................................................................237
Ukraine RoHS material content declaration..............................................................................237
Warranty information............................................................................................................237
D Ordering HP tape cartridges and barcode label packs................................239
Where to buy tape cartridges and barcode labels....................................................................239
Part numbers for tape cartridges and barcode labels.................................................................239
E Installing a redundant PDU......................................................................241
PDU components..................................................................................................................241
Leakage current....................................................................................................................241
Redundancy.........................................................................................................................241
Power rating........................................................................................................................241
Placement of redundant PDU components................................................................................242
Installation of redundant PDU components...............................................................................242
Glossary..................................................................................................243
Index.......................................................................................................246
8 Contents
1 Library overview
The HP Enterprise Modular Library (EML) E-Series Tape Libraries provide performance, reliability
and investment protection for your data protection needs. With up to 16 HP LTO tape drives, the
EML E-Series boasts native throughput of over 6.9 TB/hr. Based on the HP Extended Tape Library
Architecture (ETLA), controllers help to ensure that rogue I/O requests do not interrupt the backup
or recovery job in progress. Additionally, the hardware itself is very reliable, designed for 24x7
environments. Investment protection is achieved through the addition of expansion modules, the
EML E-Series library scales within the library footprint to 16 drives and 442 slots for maximum
performance, or 8 drives and 505 slots for maximum capacity.
The EML E-Series Tape Libraries contain the following features:
• Scalable capacity from 71 slots to 505 slots
• Scalable performance up to 16 Ultrium tape drives with 442 slots
• Interface controllers protect tape drives from SAN events
• Remote management via Command View for Tape Libraries software or the command line
interface
• Easy to use touch screen graphical user interface
• User configurable load ports with removable magazines
• Certified under the HP Enterprise Backup Solution (EBS)
• Factory and field rack configurations
• 2,000,000 mean swaps between failure
Available configurations
You can order the library in the following configurations.
Table 1 EML configurations
Configuration Illustration Height in Maximum Configurable Configurable Number of
“U” slots load port reserved possible
available slots (in slots tape drives
multiples of
5)
71e1 base modulefield racked 12 71 0–5 0 1–4
103e1 base module factory 12 103 0–5 0–9 1–4

racked
Available configurations 9
Table 1 EML configurations (continued)
multiples of
5)
245e1 base module1 tape drive 24 245 0–15 0–9 1–8

expansion module1 card cage
expansion modulefactory racked

expansion modules1 card cage

expansion module1 capacity

10 Library overview
Table 1 EML configurations (continued)
multiples of
5)


expansion modulesfactory racked
Available configurations 11
Parts of the library
The following figures show the parts of a 469e library. See (page 9).
Figure 1 Front view of the library
1. Reserved space. If your library contains LTO4 or later 2. Base module

tape drives, this space contains the switch for the internal
network.
3. Tape drive expansion module 4. Card cage expansion module
5. Capacity expansion module 6. Robotics unit
7. Viewing windows 8. Operator control panel (OCP)
9. 5-Cartridge load port 10. 4U blank covers
11. 10-Cartridge load ports
12 Library overview
Figure 2 Rear view of the library
1. Reserved space 2. Switch for the internal network (in libraries with LTO4 or
later tape drives only)
3. Base module 4. Tape drive expansion module
5. Card cage expansion module 6. Capacity expansion module
7. Main power switch 8. Base module card cage (e2400-FC 2Gb interface
controller shown)
9. Tape drives (LTO3 tape drives shown) 10. Cable management features
11. Fans 12. Power supplies
13. Power strips 14. Power distribution unit (PDU)
Base module
The 12U base module (see (page 12) and (page 13)) resides at the top of the library below the
2U reserved space or the switch for the internal network.
In the EML 71e, the base module contains a total of 71 LTO slots. Five slots within a load port are
configurable as either import/export slots or storage slots. No reserved slots are available.
In all other EML configurations, the base module contains a total of 103 LTO slots. Five slots are
configurable as either import/export slots or storage slots within a load port through the use of a
removable magazine. You can configure 9 slots as reserved. A common use for reserved slots is
for holding cleaning cartridges. The number of usable permanent slots depends on whether it is
the bottom module in the library because the library floor is always attached to the bottom module
Base module 13
and the floor limits the distance that the robot can travel. If the library floor is attached to the base
module, the bottom two rows (containing 16 slots) cannot be used.
The robotics unit is located at the top of the base module. When fully retracted (or parked), the
robot is fully contained within a 2U space. For safety reasons, the robot is parked before the center
door can be opened.
Within the robot, a lift table assembly contains a motor, pulleys, and cables to move the table up
and down to a specific level in the library. The picker assembly moves front and back, and
side-to-side along the table. A barcode scanner, attached to the bottom of the picker assembly,
scans targets on rack components for alignment, as well as barcode labels on tape cartridges, if
they are present. The picker has fingers that remove and insert tape cartridges among storage
slots, tape drives, or load ports.
Figure 3 Robotics unit
1. Robotics unit 2. Lift-flex retraction handle

3. Ratchet tool 4. Robot picker
5. Lift suspension cable 6. Table assembly
7. Lift pole 8. Lift-flex cable
The base module has two windows on the front for viewing the robotic motion inside the library.
A load port door is located to the right front (see (page 12)) where a 5-cartridge magazine can
be loaded with tape cartridges for insertion into or removal from the library. The load ports are
mechanical devices that enable you to import and export tape cartridges to and from the library
through removable magazines, or act as additional library storage slots. These two functions for
a load port cannot be mixed; you must either designate an entire load port to be import/export
slots or storage slots. The base module contains a load port capable of using one 5-cartridge
magazine. An operator control panel (OCP) is located at the bottom front of the base module.
The base module contains an autoranging power supply (a redundant power supply is optional),
card cage, cable management features, and space for mounting up to four LTO-technology tape
drives on the back.
14 Library overview
The card cage in the base module (see (page 15)) provides six cPCI slots for the following:
• Library robotics controller (see (page 18)) A single slot, 6U-wide cPCI board having Ethernet
ports and an RS-232 port. One Ethernet port connects this controller to the Interface Manager
card.
• Interface Manager card (see (page 18)) A single slot, 4U-wide cPCI board having six Ethernet
ports. This board contains 128MB of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) plus a 256MB
CompactFlash memory card, both in their own sockets. A 2U-wide adapter panel next to the
4U-wide Interface Manager card enables it to fit in the lowest 6U-wide card cage slot.
• Interface controller A cPCI board, having two FC ports for connecting to the SAN, along with
four FC ports for connecting up to four HP LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives. LTO4 and later tape
drives do not connect to the interface controller; instead, they connect directly to the SAN.
The interface controller is available in two speeds. The e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
has an FC speed of 2 Gbps, is 6U wide, and uses a single slot (see (page 20)). The e2400-FC
4Gb interface controller has an FC speed of 4 Gbps, is 4U wide, and uses two slots (see
(page 20)).
Figure 4 Base module card cage (LTO3 tape drives shown)
1. Base module card cage 2. Interface Manager card

3. Interface controller (e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller 4. Library robotics controller
shown)
5. Adapter panel
The cable management feature is a spool, mounted near the tape drives, that enables LAN and
FC cables to be dressed and routed away from hot plug or hot swap components.
Expansion modules
Three expansion modules are available to increase library capacity beyond that provided by the
base module. These expansions modules are:
• Tape drive expansion module
• Card cage expansion module
• Capacity expansion module
IMPORTANT: If you are adding expansion modules to an EML 71e, you must purchase a capacity
upgrade license for Command View TL (part number AH063A). This license upgrades your base
module from 71 slots to 103 slots. You must also make sure that your rack has side panels and
doors installed to comply with regulatory requirements.
Expansion modules 15
Tape drive expansion module
The tape drive expansion module is an 8U chassis containing 94 LTO slots (84 permanent and
10 configurable). The number of usable permanent slots depends on whether it is the bottom module
in the library because the library floor is always attached to the bottom module and the floor limits
the distance that the robot can travel. If the library floor is attached to the tape drive expansion
module, the bottom row (containing seven slots) cannot be used.
CAUTION: Never operate the library with the floor removed. The robot can be damaged.
The tape drive expansion module has three windows on the front for viewing the robotic motion
inside the library. To the right is a 10-cartridge configurable load port that holds two 5-cartridge
magazines.
On the back, the module contains one primary power supply with a slot provided for another
optional redundant power supply. Up to four Ultrium tape drives can be installed in the tape drive
expansion module. Cable management features are provided for cable routing and dressing.
Figure 5 Tape drive expansion module
1. Viewing windows 2. 10-Cartridge load port

3. Power supplies (optional redundant power supply shown) 4. Tape drives (LTO3 tape drives shown)
5. Cable management features
Card cage expansion module

The card cage expansion module is a 4U chassis that contains 48 permanent LTO slots and space
for additional interface controllers. This module must be located directly below the top 8U tape
drive expansion module. The number of usable permanent slots depends on whether it is the bottom
module in the library because the library floor is always attached to the bottom module and the
floor limits the distance that the robot can travel. If the library floor is attached to the card cage
expansion module, the last two rows (containing 16 slots) cannot be used.
The front of the card cage expansion module has one window for viewing robotic motion inside
the library. On the back, six PCI card slots are available for additional interface controllers to
expand the library tape drive capacity. One interface controller is added for every four additional
LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives. LTO4 and later tape drives do not connect to an interface controller;
instead, they connect directly to the SAN. Two power supplies are located at the bottom of the
card cage, and two cooling fans are on the right.
16 Library overview
Figure 6 Card cage expansion module
1. Viewing window 2. 4U blank cover

3. Card slots 4. Power supplies
5. Fans
Capacity expansion module

The capacity expansion module is an 8U chassis containing 120 LTO slots (110 permanent and
10 configurable). If the library floor is attached to the capacity expansion module, the bottom row
containing 10 slots is blocked and cannot be used.
If the capacity expansion module is placed below the base module or a tape drive expansion
module, six slots at the top of the back wall cannot be used because the tape drives in the module
above it prevent the robot from reaching these slots.
On the front of the capacity expansion module are three windows for viewing the robotic motion
inside the library. To the right is a 10-cartridge configurable load port that holds two 5-cartridge
magazines.
On the back of the capacity expansion module are cable management features for cable routing
and dressing.
Figure 7 Capacity expansion module
1. Viewing windows 2. 10-Cartridge load port

3. Cable management features
Controller cards
This section explains the function of the three major cards that control the library. These cards are:
• Library robotics controller
• Interface Manager card
• Interface controller
Controller cards 17
Library robotics controller
The library robotics controller contains firmware to control the robot, communicate with the Interface
Manager card, manage the library servo and vision control, and monitor the door and load port
sensor status.
Robot commands are sent from hosts in the SAN to an interface controller, which directs them over
an internal Ethernet network to the library robotics controller. The library robotics controller translates
these commands into movements to be performed by the robot.
Figure 8 Ports on the library robotics controller
1. Private Ethernet port (not used) 2. Public Ethernet port (connection to Interface Manager
card)
3. Reserved port (not used) 4. CLI port (RS-232–HP services only)
Interface Manager card

The Interface Manager card is an HP proprietary management card designed to consolidate and
simplify the management of multiple interface controllers installed in the library. It also provides
SAN-related diagnostics and management for library components, including the interface controllers,
tape drives, and robotics. The Interface Manager card, in conjunction with HP Command View TL
software, provides remote management of the library by using a serial, Telnet, or Web-based
graphical user interface (GUI).
Figure 9 Ports on the Interface Manager card 342213–001 or 393531–001
1. Cascade Ethernet port (connection to library robotics 2. Private Ethernet ports to interface controllers
controller)
3. Network Ethernet port (to management station) 4. Serial port
5. Auxiliary RJ-11 serial connector (not used)
Figure 10 Ports on the Interface Manager card 480240-001
1. Cascade Ethernet port (connection to library robotics 2. Private Ethernet ports to interface controllers
controller)
3. Network Ethernet port (to management station) 4. Serial port
5. USB port
18 Library overview
The Interface Manager card communicates with the management station over the LAN. The
management station is a Microsoft Windows-based PC (server) that hosts the Command View TL
software. Ideally, the management station should have a static IP address, and be dedicated for
use with the Interface Manager card and Command View TL software.
IP connections on the EML can be IPv4 or IPv6 format. The library can be configured to use one
or both formats, but can not operate if neither protocol is enabled. View the IP connections on the
Identity Screen (from the Home screen select Status, then Identity Screen).
Figure 11 Viewing IP connections from the Identity Screen
Enable or disable the protocols from the Change Network Settings screen, then view and save the
settings from that same screen.
To view and change the settings for either IPv4 or IPv6:
1. From the Home screen, select Configuration.
2. From the Library Configuration menu select Change Network Settings.
Figure 12 Viewing the Change Network Settings screen
3. To enable or disable IPv4 or IPv6, touch the appropriate Enable or Disable button.
4. To view or change the settings, touch the appropriate Settings button.
NOTE: Some settings are read-only.
Controller cards 19
5. To save any changes to the network settings, select the Save button at the bottom, right of the
OCP.
Any client machine on the LAN can communicate with the Interface Manager card either through
the GUI or through a command line interface (CLI). At a higher level, multiple libraries, each
containing an Interface Manager card, can be connected to a single management station. Each
Interface Manager card can communicate with only one management station, but the management
station can communicate with multiple Interface Manager cards.
After being configured, the Interface Manager card is used to configure the interface controllers
based on knowledge of the library and SAN. As robotics commands are received from the interface
controllers, the Interface Manager card acts as a switch to relay these commands to the library
robotics controller. The Interface Manager card contains on-board Flash memory to provide a
persistent history of the library and storage network health.
Interface controller
The interface controller is an HP proprietary card that provides FC connectivity for LTO2 and LTO3
tape drives and robotics in the SAN. Commands, data, and status information are transferred to
and from this controller, from hosts, the robot, and the LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives. One interface
controller can manage up to four LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives.
LTO4 and later tape drives do not connect to an interface controller; instead, they connect directly
to the SAN. Libraries that contain only LTO4 or later tape drives still need one interface controller
which is used to direct commands to the robot. The interface controller is available in two speeds:
2 Gbps and 4 Gbps.
Ports on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller

Figure 13 Ports on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
1. FC ports to LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives 2. FC ports to hosts

3. Ethernet port (connection to Interface Manager card) 4. Serial port
Ports on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller

Figure 14 Ports on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller
1. FC ports to LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives 2. FC ports to hosts

3. Ethernet port (connection to Interface Manager card) 4. Serial port
20 Library overview
Changing the master controller (SIPP master)
One interface controller is assigned by the Interface Manager card as the master controller the
SIPP master. Only the SIPP master is designated to send commands to the library robotics controller.
If multiple interface controllers are present, Command View TL software, through the Cabling View,
can be used to determine which one is acting as the SIPP master. Changing the SIPP master requires
a service-level password and command using the CLI (Telnet or serial). The commands are:
SERVICE L&TTPASSWORD
SET IPCONNECTION INTERFACE MASTER X
, if the IM firmware is i182 or lower
SERVICE L&TTPASSWORD
SET IPCONNECTION MASTER X
, if the IM firmware is I200 or higher
where L&TTPASSWORD is the Library and Tape Tools (L&TT) password and X is the interface
controller number. Obtain the password Find the interface controller number by using the SHOW
INTERFACE INFO ALL CLI command.
If the master interface controller (designated SIPP master) is replaced, the Hardware Replacement
wizard sets up the SIPP master. If the master interface controller (designated SIPP master) is moved
to another interface controller in the library, perform the following manual service steps:
1. Remove all partitions.
2. Remove all host maps.
3. Log in to the CLI and obtain service-level access.
4. Use the SET IPCONNECTION MASTER X command to make a particular interface controller
the SIPP master. Currently, the Interface Manager card does not automatically failover an
interface controller, even if the previous SIPP master is missing.
5. Reconfigure maps and partitions.
Backplane boards
A backplane provides the interface between the components within a module and also provides
the interface between modules. The backplanes are located inside the modules. Cards, power
supplies, tape drives, and other components all plug into the backplanes. The following backplanes
are those that can be replaced by service personnel.
8U base module backplane

The connectors that face the rear of the library connect to:
• cPCI bus slots
• Tape drive assemblies
• Power supplies
• Fans
• OCP
• 4U base module
The connectors that face the front of the library connect to:
• Robotics unit (through a blind mate connector)
• Load port door sensor
• DC power
Flash memory (32MB) on the backplane contains configuration information that can be loaded
into a new library robotics controller when a library robotics controller is replaced.
Backplane boards 21
A field programmable gate array (FPGA) lights the tape drive fault LED when instructed to do so
by the library robotics controller. The FPGA also monitors the following components in the base
module:
• Tape drives and fan status.
• Tape drives 1 and 2 present status.
• Tape drive assemblies' temperature.
4U base module backplane

The 4U base module backplane has the following connections:
• 8U base module
• Expansion module
• DC power
Tape drive expansion module backplane

The 8U tape drive expansion module backplane resides in the tape drive expansion module. It
has connections to:
• Power supplies with load sharing
• Load port door sensor
22 Library overview
Card cage expansion module backplane
The 4U card cage backplane resides in the card cage expansion module. It has connections to:
• cPCI slots for up to four interface controllers
• Fans
• Power supplies
Functional description
The library receives commands and data throughout the SAN from hosts running applications from
approved independent software vendors (ISVs). Host bus adapters (HBAs) in servers send this traffic
over FC links, usually through FC switches. For LTO4 and later tape drives, the traffic goes directly
to the tape drive; but for LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives, the traffic first goes through an interface
controller. One interface controller can connect up to four LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives. For all
libraries, regardless of whether they contain LTO2 and LTO3 or LTO4 and later tape drives, at
least one interface controller is required to pass tape cartridge changer (robotics) commands to
the Interface Manager card over a private network. The Interface Manager card passes these SCSI
commands on to the library robotics controller over the private network, taking advantage of the
error handling and retry capabilities of TCP/IP.
Figure 15 Library network
1. Hosts 2. FC Switch (SAN)

3. Interface controller 4. Interface Manager card
5. LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives 6. Library robotics controller
7. Robot 8. OCP
9. Serial connection 10. Telnet connection
11. Management station 12. Library boundary
13. LTO4 and later tape drives 14. Switch for the internal network
In addition to receiving traffic from the interface controllers, the Interface Manager card receives
command and diagnostic requests over an Ethernet connection from three other possible sources.
The majority of requests come from a management station where Command View TL software
resides. The other two sources are through a Telnet session or a serial interface. The Interface
Manager card works in the background to manage library functions. It configures the interface
Functional description 23
controllers to direct commands from host systems to the appropriate LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive or
to the library robotics controller.
The library robotics controller receives commands over an internal private network and from the
OCP. It manages robotics movement, monitors the door and load port sensor status, and stores
library information in volatile memory.
Load ports and magazines

The load ports are mechanical devices on the front of the library that enable you to import and
export tape cartridges to and from the library through removable magazines, or act as additional
library storage slots. These two functions for a load port cannot be mixed; you must either designate
an entire load port to be import/export slots or storage slots. The base module contains a load
port capable of using one 5-cartridge magazine. The 8U expansion modules contain load ports
capable of using two 5-cartridge magazines each.
Figure 16 Library load ports on 40U configuration
Tape drives
The Ultrium tape drive is a high performance streaming tape drive that uses LTO technology. The
library can use Ultrium 460 (LTO 2), Ultrium 960 (LTO 3), Ultrium 1840 (LTO4), Ultrium 3280
(LTO5) and Ultrium 6650 (LTO6) tape drives.
The Ultrium 960 and later include support for both rewriteable and Write-Once, Read-Many
(WORM) tape cartridges. WORM tape cartridges provide an enhanced level of data security
against alteration of data because you cannot erase or overwrite them. To check whether your
backup or archive software application supports WORM tape cartridges, see the following web
site: http://www.hp.com/go/connect.
For optimum performance, always use a tape cartridge that matches the specifications of your
tape drive. You can find comparisons between the Ultrium tape drives in (page 231).
Tape cartridges and cleaning cartridges are specifically formatted for use with Ultrium drives. To
order Ultrium tape cartridges, see “Ordering HP tape cartridges and barcode label packs” (page
239).
24 Library overview
Switch for the internal network
CAUTION: Do not connect this switch to your local LAN. It is for internal library use only.
Connecting this switch to the LAN could cause library components to perform incorrectly or report
failures.
The 24-port Ethernet switch provides a private management network to connect the Interface
Manager card to the LTO4 or later tape drives. You must install one switch in each library that
contains LTO4 or later tape drives.
Figure 17 Ports on the switch for the internal network
1. 10/100Base-TX RJ-45 ports
Operator control panel

The OCP displays library status information and enables you to access the library menus with a
touch screen. Use these menus to view and change the library settings, move tape cartridges,
obtain status information, or run diagnostic tests. Functions provided by the OCP are:
• Robotic and tape drive firmware revision reporting
• Library configuration
• Library and tape drive serial number reporting
• Critical component status report
• Critical component failure notification
• Ability to move tapes to and from any location
• Ability to configure barcode label length and justification reporting to the front panel and to
the host
• Access to error information
• Adjust screen contrast
Switch for the internal network 25

Figure 18 Location of the OCP
Numbering
All of the tape cartridge slots and tape drives in a library are numbered with a coordinate system.
You might see these numbers in your application software or in error or diagnostic messages. Error
messages often include a slot location in the format MRC x,y,z. This identifies a module (x), row
(y), and column (z) location.
Each module has a different number of available slots, but a common numbering scheme for
identifying the slot location.
The library numbers the LTO slots using the following scheme:
• In general, the library numbers the slots one module at a time, starting with the top module.
For slot numbering purposes, the 12U base module is considered to be two modules: an 8U
base module and a 4U base module.
• Within each module, column numbering starts with 1 at the left column as viewed from the
front of the library.
• Within each module, row numbering starts with 1 at the top row.
• Any reserved slots, located in the first column of the 8U base module, and taking up as many
as nine slots, are not included in the numbering scheme. A common use for reserved slots is
for holding cleaning cartridges.
NOTE: Reserved slots are not available on the EML 71e.
• If the load port slots are configured as import/export slots, they are skipped and not counted
in the numbering of storage slots. If the load port slots are instead configured as storage slots,
they are counted in the numbering scheme.
NOTE: Reconfiguring the load port slots for either import/export or storage changes the slot
numbering in any lower modules the next time you perform an inventory.
• Some slots are not available in the bottom module in the library because the floor limits the
distance that the robot can travel.
26 Library overview
The slot numbering for various modules are shown on the following pages:
• Base module of the EML 71e ((page 27))
• Base module of all other configurations ((page 28))
• Tape drive expansion module ((page 28))
• Card cage expansion module ((page 29))
• Capacity expansion module ((page 29))
Figure 19 Slot numbering in the base module for the EML 71e
1. Robot park zone 2. Array targets for the barcode scanner

3. Slots available for data cartridges 4. Software demarcation between upper and lower modules
for slot counting purposes
5. Tape drives 6. Expansion identification label
7. Row numbering 8. Column numbering
9. Load port slots 10. 8U base module
11. 4U base module 12. Tape drive numbering
Numbering 27
Figure 20 Slot numbering in the base module for all other EML configurations
1. Robot park zone 2. Array targets for the barcode scanner

3. Reserved slots-can be used for cleaning cartridges or 4. Software demarcation between upper and lower modules
data cartridges for slot counting purposes
5. Slots available for data cartridges 6. Slots unavailable for use when the library floor is installed
in this module
11. Load port slots 12. 8U base module
13. 4U base module 14. Tape drive numbering
Figure 21 Slot numbering in the tape drive expansion module
1. Slots available for data cartridges 2. Array targets

3. Slots unavailable for use when the library floor is installed 4. Tape drive numbering
in this module
9. Load port slots
28 Library overview
Figure 22 Slot numbering in the card cage expansion module

3. Slots unavailable for use when the library floor is installed 4. Expansion identification label
in this module
Figure 23 Slot numbering in the capacity expansion module

3. Slots unavailable for use when the library floor is installed 4. Slots unavailable for use when a base module or tape
in this module drive expansion module is above this module
7. Load port slots
Command View TL
Command View TL provides a browser-based GUI for remote management and monitoring of the
Interface Manager card through a LAN. Command View TL is the preferred method for controlling
the Interface Manager card. In conjunction with the Interface Manager card, Command View TL
provides the following:
• Configuration and management of the Interface Manager card and FC interface controllers
• Management of the entire library system
• Hardware inventory and identity information
• Status information for connected hardware
• Error reporting and comprehensive error logs
• Firmware management
• License management
Command View TL is installed on a management station and communicates with the Interface
Manager card through the LAN. The management station processes information from the Interface
Manager card and serves up the Command View TL GUI. You can access Command View TL from
Command View TL 29
the management station directly, or through any client on the LAN using a browser-based GUI.
Multiple Command View TL clients can be simultaneously open across the LAN, and multiple
libraries can be managed through the Command View TL software.
See the Command View TL documentation at http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl for prerequisites,
installation, and operating instructions.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading an EML 71e, you must purchase a capacity upgrade license
for Command View TL (part number AH063A). This license upgrades your base module from 71
slots to 103 slots.
Use Command View TL version 2.8.00 or 3.7.00 for capacity licensing. As of July 2014, the latest
version of Command View TL is 3.7.00.
Library and Tape Tools

Library and Tape Tools (L&TT) is a collection of storage hardware management and diagnostic
tools assembled into a single, convenient program. L&TT offers a GUI or command screen interface
(CSI), enabling you to perform the following functions with the library:
• Installation check Guides you through a basic installation check of the library. The software
helps you choose an appropriate HBA, making sure that the device is detected by the system,
and verifying key device functionality.
• Device identification Identifies the storage products connected to the system, along with key
information on product configuration and status.
• Troubleshooting tests Provides various tests to verify product functionality or to isolate product
issues. Tests include device self-tests, read/write tests on tape drives, exerciser tests for
autoloaders and libraries, and specific device utilities.
• Support ticket generation If you experience a problem with a storage product, L&TT can
generate a support ticket that includes essential information for troubleshooting the problem.
• Automatic notification of Web updates If a connection to the Internet is present and Web
updates are enabled in the tool preferences, L&TT automatically informs you of the following
updates, if available, each time the program is started:
◦ New versions of L&TT
◦ New firmware files for connected devices
◦ New device-specific functionality (such as new or updated tests) for connected devices
For more information on L&TT, go to the web site http://www.hp.com/support/tapetools.
30 Library overview
2 Using the library
This chapter describes operating procedures for the library.
Powering on the library

1. Close the center door of the library and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise
to lock it.
Figure 24 Closing the center door
2. At the back of the library, press the library main power switch to the I (On) position.
Figure 25 Library main power switch control
1. Library main power switch
NOTE: The following step applies only when the library is powered on for the first time or
when a new interface controller is installed. This step is necessary to put the interface controller
into managed mode.
Powering on the library 31

3. If this is the first time the library has been powered on after delivery, or if a new interface
controller was installed, configure the interface controller so that it is recognized by the Interface
Manager card. Do one of the following:
• If your library has an e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller, wait approximately two minutes,
and turn off the main power switch. Wait several seconds and then turn on the power
switch again.
• If your library has an e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller, reset the interface controller
twice. To reset the interface controller, insert a paper clip into the reset hole. After resetting
the interface controller, wait three minutes, then reset it again.
NOTE: A 71e library requires approximately 15 minutes to initialize. All other library models
require up to an hour to initialize and do an inventory. Nothing appears on the OCP for the
first few minutes of this process.
Powering off the library

1. Use your backup software to stop all library activity and make sure the picker is empty.
2. On the OCP, select the Operations→Unlock Door command to park the robot.
3. After the robot is parked, press the main power switch ((page 31)) to the O (Off) position.
Center-door interlock
The center door on the front of the library cannot be opened until a password-protected command
to unlock the center door is selected on the OCP. This command parks the robot, and actuates a
lever that enables you to open the center door. Even if the unit is powered off, the robot must be
parked before you can open the center door. If the robot is not parked prior to removing power,
you cannot readily open the center door (see (page 53)).
Performing an inventory
The library does an inventory at three different times:
• When you turn on the power to the library
• When you reboot the library (Operations→Reboot Library)
• When you open and close the center door of the library (Operations→Unlock Door )
During the inventory:
• The library robotics controller applies voltage to the motors (picker, reach, wrist, and lift drive)
to obtain range of motion for each motor.
• The range of motion of the robot is tested.
• The targets and labels are read for calibration purposes.
• The barcode scanner looks at each slot to see if it contains a tape. The library robotics controller
stores this information. You must configure the library to use or not use barcode labels
(Configuration→Library Configuration→Configure Inventory Mode). If barcode labels are not
used, the inventory time may take as long as an hour, and a tape cartridge in a slot is only
known to the library as being full.
When the robot is parked

The initialization sequence can start with the robot fully retracted into the robotics unit (parked) or
with the robot outside of the robotics unit (not parked). When the robot is parked, the firmware
tells the robotic components to do several actions:
1. Move the picker to the open and then the closed positions.
2. Move the reach components to the extended end stop, and then to the retracted end stop.
32 Using the library

3. Move the wrist to the counterclockwise end stop, and then to the clockwise end stop.
4. Lower the lift components from the top end stop to the bottom end stop.
5. Move the lift components off the floor a few inches (a clicking noise is normal during this
move).
6. Move the horizontal components to the front end stop, and then to the back end stop.
7. Move the horizontal components to the center position so the wrist can be initialized.
9. Move the wrist to point at the back of the rack (parallel with the horizontal axis).
10. If no tape cartridge is present, move the reach components to the extended end stop, and
then to the retracted end stop.
11. If no tape cartridge is present, move the picker to the closed end stop, and then to the open
end stop.
12. Scan the library for module configuration labels.
13. Begin the calibration and inventory, using the hand assembly barcode scanner:
a. Use the target on each array to determine fine positioning.
b. Scan each slot to read the label of any tape cartridge present. The volatile memory on
the library robotics controller stores the information.
TIP: The library inventory process is faster when you use barcode labels on all your tape
cartridges, and you configure the library to only use barcode labels.
14. If a tape cartridge is present, place the tape cartridge in an empty load port slot, if available.
If no load port slot is available, place the tape cartridge in the next available slot within the
library.
If no slot is available, the initialization fails, and a message appears on the library console
saying that the tape cartridge needs to be removed from the hand or a load port slot needs
to be made available.
15. After the tape cartridge is dropped off, point the wrist in the tape drive direction.
16. Move the reach components to the extended end stop, and then to the retracted end stop.
17. Move the gripper to the open and then the closed positions.
When the robot is not parked

When the library is powered on, the firmware does not know the position of each of the robotic
components. The firmware must determine, one at a time, when each component can be moved
from end stop to end stop.
NOTE: The actual steps can vary, depending on component positions, but generally follow the
order stated below.
1. Check for a tape cartridge present in the hand. If a tape cartridge is present, make sure that
the tape cartridge is gripped securely.
2. Make sure that the reach components are fully retracted.
4. Move the wrist to the Column 1 position (perpendicular to the horizontal axis).
5. Move the horizontal components to the back end stop, and then to the front end stop.
6. Move the horizontal components to the home position, in front of the table.
7. Lower the lift components from the top end stop to the bottom end stop.
8. Move the lift components off the floor a few inches (a clicking noise is normal during this
move).
9. Move the wrist to point at the back of the rack (parallel with the horizontal axis).
Performing an inventory 33
10. If no tape cartridge is present, move the reach components to the extended end stop, and
then to the retracted end stop.
11. Scan the library for module configuration labels.
12. If no tape cartridge is present, move the picker to the closed end stop, and then to the open
end stop.
13. Move the gripper to the open position.
14. Begin the calibration and inventory, using the hand assembly barcode scanner:
a. Use the target on each array to determine fine positioning.
b. Scan each slot to read the label of any cartridge present. The volatile memory on the
library robotics controller stores the information.
TIP: The library inventory process is faster when you use barcode labels on all your tape
cartridges, and you configure the library to only use barcode labels.
15. If a tape cartridge is present, place the tape cartridge in an empty load port slot if available.
If no load port slot is available, place the tape cartridge in the next available slot within the
library.
If no slot is available, the initialization fails, and a message appears on the library console
saying that the tape cartridge needs to be removed from the hand or a load port slot needs
to be made available.
Attaching barcode labels to tape cartridges

Attaching barcode labels enables the library and application software to identify the tape cartridge
quickly, thereby speeding up inventory time. When a barcode label is not used, the library simply
designates that tape slot as being full. Even though the library functions without barcode labels,
HP recommends that you use them on your tape cartridges. Your host software can use barcode
labels to track the following information:
• Date of format or initialization
• Media pool of tape
• Data residing on the tape
• Age of the backup
• Errors encountered while using the tape (to determine if the tape is faulty)
CAUTION: Handle tape cartridges with care. Do not drop or mishandle them, or place them
near sources of electromagnetic interference. Rough handling can damage the tape cartridge
making it unusable and potentially hazardous to the tape drives.
CAUTION: The misuse of barcode technology can result in backup and restore failures. To ensure
that your barcodes meet HP's quality standards, always purchase them from an approved supplier
and never print barcode labels yourself. For more information, see the order form provided with
the library, as well as the Barcode Label Requirements, Compatibility and Usage white paper
available from http://www.hp.com/support.
NOTE: For information on ordering tape cartridges and barcode labels, see “Ordering HP tape
cartridges and barcode label packs” (page 239).
Ultrium tape cartridges have a recessed area located on the face of the tape cartridge next to the
write-protect switch. Use this area for attaching the adhesive-backed barcode label. Only apply
labels onto the tape cartridge in this designated area. For successful operation of your tape library,
place the barcode label entirely within the recessed area, making sure that no part of the label
extends outside.

Figure 26 Proper barcode label placement
Position the barcode label as shown in the following figure, with the alphanumeric portion facing
the hub side of the tape cartridge (LTO2) or numeric portion away from the hub (LTO3 and later).
Never apply multiple labels onto a tape cartridge, because extra labels can cause the tape cartridge
to jam inside a tape drive.
Always use the proper barcode labels for your tape drive technology. An L2 (Ultrium 460), L3
(Ultrium 960), L4 (Ultrium 1840), or L5 (Ultrium 3280), L6 (Ultrium 6650) identifier is located at
the end of the 8-character Ultrium barcode labels on data cartridges. The universal LTO cleaning
cartridges have a CLN and L1 identifier on the label.
Figure 27 Attaching an Ultrium barcode label
Setting the write-protect switch

Each tape cartridge has a sliding write-protect switch. This switch determines whether new data
can be written to the tape cartridge (write-enabled) or whether data on the tape cartridge is
protected from being erased or overwritten (write-protected).
By moving the switch to the left, the tape cartridge is write-enabled. By moving the switch to the
right, the tape cartridge is write-protected.
Setting the write-protect switch 35

Figure 28 Write-protecting Ultrium tape cartridges
1. Write-enabled 2. Write-protected
3. Write-protect switch 4. Barcode label
5. Insertion arrow
Inserting tape cartridges into the load port

Inserting tapes through the center door of the library should only be done when bulk loading. At
all other times, load tape cartridges into the library through the load port. Not using the load port
stops all robotic activity and tape movement, and requires a complete library inventory before
operations can resume. When using the load port, tape cartridges are inserted into 5-cartridge
magazines, which are placed into either the 5-cartridge load port or a 10-cartridge load port. To
use a load port:
1. Attach a barcode label to each tape cartridge (see (page 34)).
2. Write-protect or write-enable each tape cartridge as appropriate (see (page 35)).
3. On the OCP, select Operations→Unlock Load Ports. If the load ports are password protected
and you are prompted to enter the password, use the keypad that appears on the OCP to
enter the password, then press the Enter key on the touchscreen. All load port doors open.
4. Grab the handle on the magazine and pull it out of the library.
CAUTION: Guard plates prevent access to the inside of the library when a load port
magazine is removed. These doors will move back out of the way when a magazine is
reinserted. You should not attempt to otherwise move these guards, nor gain access to the
library through the load ports.
5. Insert the tape cartridges into any available slots in the magazine.
CAUTION: Excessive force when inserting a magazine can cause a tape cartridge to unseat
and extend into the path of the robot.
6. Align the magazine with the track on the load port door and gently slide the magazine through
the spring door and fully into the load port.
7. Close the load port door.

8. After all load port doors are closed, the library does an inventory of the load ports.
Figure 29 Inserting a magazine into the load port
Using the OCP

The OCP is an LCD screen located on the front of the library that is operated by touch. The icons,
text, and tabs on the OCP enable you to obtain information about the library, execute library
commands, and test library functions.
OCP icons
The following table displays icons that can appear on the OCP.
Table 2 OCP icons
Icon Description
Critical error—A component failure has made the library inoperable.
Warning—A component failure has degraded library activity, but the library
is still operable.
Ready—The library is online and ready for operation.
Thumbtack out—The screen is eligible to be selected for display after a period

of inactivity.
Thumbtack in—The screen has been selected for display after a period of
inactivity. Only one screen at a time can be thumbtacked.
Item selection—The item can be selected from a menu list.
Password required—A password is required to access this feature.
Password entered—The correct password has been entered. The command is

available.
Using the OCP 37

Home screen
The first screen that appears after library initialization is the Home screen. After the library status
is determined (ready, warning, or error), that status appears on the Home screen, and you can
touch the screen to access other functional and operational screens.
Figure 30 Home screen
OCP tabs and status bar

After touching the Home screen, the menu screen appears. All menu screens contain a status bar
to the left of an HP logo, two rows of tabs, and an area for detailed screen information in the
center.
Figure 31 Menu screen
The status bar is a quick indicator of library health. The bar is green when the library is functioning
normally, yellow during a warning condition, and red during an error condition. Touching the
status bar takes you to the Health Summary screen.
The detailed functions of the four top-level menu tabs (Status, Configuration, Operations, and
Support) are discussed later. Selecting any of these four tabs takes you to menu items under that
screen category.
Five navigation tabs can be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The thumbtacked (in or out) tab
was discussed in (page 38). The remaining tabs are:
• Help Displays help text for features appearing on that screen.
• Page Up Scrolls text to a previous page when text is longer than a page in size.

• Page Down Scrolls text to the following page when text is longer than a page in size.
• Back Moves you one level up in the menu tree. All screens except the Home, test status, error
message, and keypad screens have this tab at the lower, right corner. Returning to the Home
screen removes all password privileges previously granted through the OCP.
Timeouts
The library enters a timeout state after five minutes of inactivity. In this state:
• The OCP backlight turns off.
• Password privileges are removed on all screens granted access.
• The OCP returns to either the Home screen or a thumbtacked screen, if one is designated. If
a thumbtacked screen consists of more than one page, the pages cycle every five seconds.
Touching a screen in a timeout state turns on the backlight. Subsequent touches after the backlight
is lit perform the requested command.
The following are special timeout cases:
• When a service password is entered, the length of time to enter a timeout state changes from
5 minutes to 30 minutes. If the OCP is touched during the 30-minute period, the library reverts
to a normal 5-minute period before a timeout.
• If a warning condition occurs while the library is timed-out, the backlight comes on for 30
minutes. If the OCP is touched during this 30-minute period, the library reverts to a normal
5-minute period before a timeout. Otherwise, the library re-enters a normal timeout state after
30 minutes.
• If an error condition occurs while the library is timed-out, the backlight comes on for 60 minutes.
If the OCP is touched during this 60-minute period, the library reverts to a normal 5-minute
period before a timeout. Otherwise, the library re-enters a normal timeout state after 60
minutes.
For certain functions, the timeout feature is disabled and re-enabled when the function completes.
This occurs:
• During an operation and until the operation completes. For example, the OCP does not time
out while a tape drive cleaning operation is in progress but waits for the operation to complete
before starting the 5-minute timeout counter.
• While displaying the results of any test operation. Select the Cancel or OK button to return to
the test menu screen.
• When displaying an error report or menu after an error. The screen is treated as temporarily
thumbtacked, which clears the password protected screens after the normal timeout period,
but displays the screen until it is acknowledged.
• When success or failure messages appear for an operation. The screen is temporarily
thumbtacked, clearing the password protected screens after the normal timeout period, but
the screen remains until acknowledged.
OCP functions
The OCP enables you to perform various functions on the library. Table 3 (page 40) provides a
list of the OCP functions available from the Home screen.
Using the OCP 39

Table 3 OCP components
Tab Options to view or select
Status Identity Screen
Health Summary >

• Library and Robotics >
◦ Library Status
◦ Robotics Status
◦ Power Supply Status > (power supplies 1–6)
• Load Ports > (load ports 1–4)

• Drives > (drives 1–16)
• Interface Controllers > (interface controllers 1–4)
• Interface Manager
Component Status >

• Library and robotics Status >
◦ Library Status
◦ Robotics Status
◦ Drive Odometers
◦ Load Port Door Status
◦ Library Sensors > (modules 1–4)
• Individual Drive Status

• All Drive Summary
• Interface Controller Status > (interface controllers 1–4)
• Interface Manager Status
Event Log Type Selection
View Library Inventory
Configuration Library Configurations >

• Change Password
◦ Load Port Access Password Option
• Configure Load Ports

• Change Network Settings
• Configure Barcode Reporting Formats >
◦ Format for front panel reporting
◦ Format for host reporting
• Configure Reserve Slots

• Configure Inventory Mode
Adjust Screen Contrast
Operations Unlock Load Ports
Unlock Door

Table 3 OCP components (continued)
Tab Options to view or select
Reboot Library
Media Operations >

• Move Tape
• Clean Drive
Run Admin Tests >

• Operator Control Panel >
◦ Align Touch Screen
◦ Panel Colors
◦ Panel Pixel Test
◦ Panel Firmware Version
◦ Turn Backlight Off
• Inventory Library
• Run Demo
• Run Self Test
• Slot Test
• Drive Load/Unload Test
• Force Rewind Unload Test
• Recalibrate Library
Support HP Support Info
Service Menu >
Contact Information
Display Library Time
Status screen
The Status screen provides access to the current state of every library component.
Power supplies, load ports, tape drives, and interface controllers are all numbered from top to
bottom in the rack. However, power supplies are numbered by slot, so if a slot is not filled with a
power supply, the slot still receives a number. For example, the top power supply slot in the rack
is power supply 1. The power supply slot under that is power supply number 2. If a power supply
is on the same level horizontally (like those in the card cage expansion module), the one to the
right (facing the back of the rack) has the next highest number. If a component is removed, the
numbering does not change until you reboot the library. After a reboot, the library rediscovers all
components and reassigns numbers from top to bottom.
Using the OCP 41

Figure 32 OCP Status screen
Table 4 Status screen functions

Function Description
Identity Screen Contains basic configuration information. The library name, IPv4 address,
and IPv6 Interface Identifier are obtained from Command View TL. Other
information comes from the robot firmware.
The number of interface controllers and tape drives installed in the library
are listed, as well as the total number of available storage slots. For
example, load port slots configured as storage slots are counted in the
total of available slots, while load ports used to move tape cartridges in
and out of the library are not counted in the total.
This screen also shows the library model, library serial number, and library
firmware version.
Health Summary Displays a status icon and health information for the library and individual
components:
• Library and Robotics—Displays the health status of the library, robotics,
and each power supply in the library.
• Load Ports—Provides the health status of each load port in the library.
• Drives—Provides the health status of each drive in the library.
• Interface Controllers—Provides the health status of each Interface
Controller in the library.
• Interface Manager—Provides the health status of the library Interface
Manager.
Component Status Identifies the status of the overall library and individual components:
• Library and Robotics Status—Displays library and robotics
characteristics, the tape drive odometer, the status of the load port
doors, and the status of the library sensors. The odometer counts the
number of loads for each tape drive. The load count is reset when a
tape drive is replaced.
• Individual Drive Status—Displays detailed tape drive information for
each tape drive on individual screens. Select the Page Up and Page
Down tabs to move between available tape drives.
• All Drive Summary—Displays an overall status of all installed tape
drives and whether they contain tape cartridges.
• Interface Controller Status—Displays the status for individual interface
controllers, showing the number of host ports, device ports, and
firmware revision.
• Interface Manager Status—Displays health and configuration
characteristics of the Interface Manager card.

Table 4 Status screen functions (continued)
Event Log Type Selection Enables you to filter informational, warning, and critical events. The five
most recent events of any category are listed with the oldest listed first
and the most recent listed last. Filtering events does not remove them from
the log.
View Library Inventory Identifies the status of each tape drive and slot location.
Configuration screen
The Configuration screen provides administrator access to screens that enable you to change the
library configuration and enables any user to adjust the contrast of the OCP screen.
Figure 33 OCP Configuration screen
Table 5 Configuration screen functions

Library Configuration enables the following items to be configured:

• Change Password—The library ships with a null password. Passwords
must be set to exactly eight characters, consisting of the numbers 0
through 9 and the period character. The password can be required to
unlock load ports. If you forget your password, contact HP support.
HP support can generate a temporary password that will enable you
to access the library.
Change Password is also used to set whether the admin password is
required to unlock the library load ports from the OCP. After entering
the existing or a new password (Configuration+Library
Configuration→Change Password), the Load Port Access Password
Option screen appears and indicates whether the password is required
or not. To toggle the setting to require the password, press the box
containing the text OCP admin password NOT required for load port
access. If the box already contains the text OCP admin password
required for load port access, the password is already required. (Press
the text box again, if appropriate, to disable password protection of
the load ports.) Press the Save button on the OCP.
• Configure Load Ports—Shows the number of installed load ports and
enables you to toggle between using each as a load port or for tape
slots. Configure it as a Load Port to move tapes in and out of the library.
Configure as Slots to increase the number of storage slots in the library.
Changing a load port configuration causes a library reboot.
• Change Network Settings—Configures the network settings for the
Interface Manager card, which can be automatically set with DHCP
(IPv4 DHCP is default), IPv4 static address, or variety of IPv6 addresses.
Using the OCP 43

Table 5 Configuration screen functions (continued)
Both IPv4 and IPv6 can be enabled, but both cannot be disabled at
the same time.
• Configure Barcode Reporting Formats—Defines how barcodes appear
on the OCP and sent to the host. Barcode reporting can be configured
as 6 to 8 characters and left or right aligned. If 6 characters with left
alignment is chosen, any characters after the six are truncated. With
6 characters and right alignment, only the last six characters are shown
with the beginning characters truncated.
• Configure Reserve Slots Up to nine slots can be reserved for special
purposes, such as cleaning tapes. The default is none. Select the number
you want to reserve and select Save.
NOTE: Reserve slots are not available on the EML 71e.
• Configure Inventory Mode enables you to require barcodes on tape
cartridges, or to make them optional. Requiring barcodes significantly
shortens inventory time.
Adjust Screen Contrast Use the up and down arrows to adjust the screen contrast. The screen
refreshes each time an arrow is pressed. Select the OK button when
finished.
Operations screen
The Operations screen provides access to screens that enable you to unlock load ports, unlock the
library door, reboot the library, move tapes, clean tape drives, and run administrative tests.
Figure 34 OCP Operations screen
Table 6 Operations screen functions

Unlock Load Ports Instructs the robot to unlock all load port doors. In library firmware version
1407 or later, this option can be protected using the admin password.
(Password protection is enabled or disabled from the Configuration
screen.) When all load port doors are closed, each load port is scanned
and inventoried.
Unlock Door Parks the robot, which enables you to open the center door of the library.
The library is reinventoried after the center door is closed.
Reboot Library Does a library reboot. Does an inventory of all tape slots and rediscovers
all hardware controllers and tape drives.

Table 6 Operations screen functions (continued)
Media Operations Performs the following tasks:

• Move Tape Select a Source and Element Type (where you want to
move a tape from) and a Destination and Element Type (where you
want to move a tape to).
Element types consist of a tape drive, load port (I/O), or slot location.
Numbers can be entered from the keypad. The up/down arrows cycle
you through full (source) or empty (destination) locations.
After choosing a source and destination, select Move.
• Clean Drive Select the cleaning media and the drive to be cleaned.
Run Admin Tests Performs the following tests:

• Operator Control Panel
◦ Align Touch Screen Touch and release the screen near the rectangle
in the center. As you approach the rectangle at some point, it
changes color. The color change takes place when the border of
the rectangle is touched. This is where the touch pad and visual
screen should be aligned. Use the Up/Down/Left/Right buttons to
align the screen.
There is no visual effect when using the adjustment buttons. Use the
touch screen again to make sure that the adjustment is how you
want it. Select the Save tab to make the adjustments permanent.
◦ Panel Colors —Displays the range of colors available to the OCP.
◦ Panel Pixel Test—Tests for bad screen pixels. Select the Test button
to turn all pixels black. Touch the screen to turn all pixels white.
Touch the screen again to end the test.
◦ Panel Firmware Version—Displays the version of the OCP firmware.
◦ Turn Backlight Off—When pressed, turns the OCP backlight off.
• Inventory Library—Performs an inventory of all the tape cartridges in

a library. Unlabeled tapes are shown as FULL if the library has been
configured to detect unlabeled tapes.
• Run Demo—Performs tape swaps between slots and load ports. Set
the number of loops to be performed (must be at least one). When the
demo completes, the tape cartridges are back in their original
configuration.
• Run Self Test—Initializes the mechanics and performs tests to make
sure the library is functioning correctly. Tests include verifying the status
of all components; tape exchanges between storage slots, load port
slots, and tape drives; and corner-to-corner slot exchanges. When the
self test completes, the tape cartridges are back in their original
locations.
• Slot Test—Performs a repeated move of a tape from one slot to another.
Select the source slot, the destination slot, and the loop count, and
then select Start Test.
• Drive Load/Unload Test—Moves media into and out of each tape
drive for a specified number of loops.
• Force Rewind Unload Test—Clears the prevent media removal bit for
a tape drive and unloads the tape cartridge to its original slot or to
the first empty slot. Interrupts the tape drive operation that is currently
running, if any. Use the Up and Down arrows to select the tape drive
that you want to force rewind unload.
• Recalibrate Library—Recalibrates all the targets in the library.
Using the OCP 45

Support screen
The Support screen provides access to screens showing HP support information, service tasks,
contact information, and enables you to display the library time.
Figure 35 OCP Support screen
Table 7 Support screen functions

HP Support Info Provides alternate locations where useful information can be

obtained.
Service Menu To be used only by authorized HP service personnel.
Contact Information Provides contact information as recorded by Command View

TL.
Display Library Time This date and time are used for support purposes and do not
necessarily reflect the local date and time.
Controls and indicators

Figure 36 Indicators on the library robotics controller
Table 8 Indicators on the library robotics controller

Index No. Control/indicator Function
1 EJECT OK LED Not used.
2 FAULT LED When flashing (red), indicates the card detects a board fault
or software initialization in progress.
3 STANDBY LED Not used.
4 ACTIVE LED Always lit (green) when power applied.

Figure 37 Indicators and reset on the Interface Manager card 342213–001 or 393531–001
Figure 38 Indicators and reset on the Interface Manager card 480240-001
Table 9 Indicators and reset on the Interface Manager cards

1 Green link speed On—Port operating at 100 Mbps.

LED Off--Port is operating at 10 Mbps, or port is not connected (see
link activity LED).
2 Green link Off--Port disconnected/no link.

activity LED On--Port connected to another Ethernet device.
Flashing--Data is being transmitted or received.
3 Red LED Green LED
On Off BIOS code failed to run.
Blinks 1x per 5 Off Either: 1) Hardware POST failed; no firmware images are
second interval loaded. 2) There is no DHCP connection.
Blinks 2x per 5 Off No CompactFlash disk or valid boot sector image found.
second interval
Blinks 3x per 5 Off Specified firmware image files cannot be found. Neither the
second interval current nor the previous image was found.
Blinks 4x per 5 Off Load or execute command failed (boot code remains at end
second interval of process). This indicates that load, decompress, or execution
failed on both the current and previous image files.
Off Blinks 1x per 5 Normal state. Load or execute command succeeded. Boot code
second interval successfully loaded, decompressed, and initiated one of the
image files.
Off Blinks 2x per 5 Normal state. Application software is initializing.

second interval
Off Blinks 3x per 5 Normal state. Application is identifying all library components.
second interval
Off On Normal state. Application has identified all library components.
4 Reset hole To reset the card, insert a paper clip into the hole.
Controls and indicators 47

e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
Figure 39 Indicators on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
Table 10 Indicators on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller

1 ACT/LNK indicators ACT indicator--When lit, shows port activity. LNK

indicatorWhen lit, shows a valid link is established.
2 PWR indicator When green, power is applied to the module.

When yellow, Power-On-Self-Test (POST) is in process or
processor problems exist.

Figure 40 Indicators on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller
Table 11 Indicators on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller

Index Control/Indicator Function
No.
1 Beacon Use to locate the card.
2 ACT/LNK indicators ACT indicator--When lit, shows port activity. LNK indicator--When lit, shows a
valid link is established.
3 PWR indicator When green, power is applied to the module.

When yellow, Power-On-Self-Test (POST) is in process or processor problems
exist.
4 Reset hole To reset the card, insert a paper clip into the hole.

LTO tape drives
Figure 41 Indicator on an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive
Table 12 Indicator on an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive

1 FAULT LED When lit (yellow), indicates that initialization is in progress,

the library robotics controller software has detected a failure
that requires the replacement of the tape drive assembly,
or a hot swap can occur.
When not lit, indicates normal operation.
Figure 42 Indicators on an LTO4 tape drive
Table 13 Indicators on an LTO4 tape drive

1 FAULT When lit (yellow), indicates that initialization is in progress,

2 ID Beacon.
3 FC A When lit (green), indicates link activity on FC port A.
4 FC B When lit (green), indicates link activity on FC port B.

Figure 43 Indicators on an LTO5 and LTO6 tape drive
Table 14 Indicators on an LTO5 or later tape drive

1 FAULT When lit (yellow), indicates that initialization is in progress,

2 ID Beacon.
3 ENCRYPTION STATUS When flashing (green), indicates that the drive is reading
or writing encrypted data.
4 MANAGEMENT ACTIVE When flashing, indicates activity across the Ethernet port.
5 MANAGEMENT SIGNAL When lit (orange), indicates the Ethernet port is connected.
6 FC A When lit (green), indicates link activity on FC port A.
7 FC B When lit (green), indicates link activity on FC port B.

Figure 44 Indicators on the switch for the internal network
Table 15 Indicators on the switch for the internal network

Index Control/indicator Function
No.
1 Power (green) On--The switch is receiving power. Off--The switch is not receiving power.
2 LED Mode Select (2 green FDx--Indicates that the port Mode LEDs are displaying whether the ports are
LEDs) operating in full-duplex. Speed--Indicates that the port Mode LEDs are displaying
the operating speed.

Table 15 Indicators on the switch for the internal network (continued)
Index Control/indicator Function
No.
3 Link/Act On--The port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected
device. Off--The port has no active network cable connected, or is not receiving
link signal. Flashing--Indicates that there is network activity on the port.
4 Mode FDx--When the FDx (full duplex) indicator LED is on, the port Mode LEDs turn on
for those ports that are operating at full duplex. Speed--When the Speed indicator
LED is on, the port Mode LEDs for ports 1--22 are lit for ports that are in 100
Mbps mode and are off for ports operating at 10 Mbps. The port Mode LEDs
for ports 23--24, are lit for ports that are in 100 or 1000 Mbps mode or are off
for ports operating at 10 Mbps.
Library main power switch

Figure 45 Control on the library main power switch
Table 16 Control on the library main power switch

1 Switch When switched On (I), powers on all library power supplies.

When switched Off (O), places all library power supplies
in standby mode.

Power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module
Figure 46 Indicator on the autoranging power supply
Table 17 Indicator on the autoranging power supply

Index No. Indicator Function
1 Power LED When lit (green), indicates that all four DC outputs and the
fan speed are within specification, and the AC boost circuit
is active.
When not lit, indicates the main library power switch is
turned off or the power supply is in a failed condition and
is available for a hot swap.
Power supply in the card cage expansion module

Figure 47 Indicators on the card cage expansion module power supply
Table 18 Indicators on the card cage expansion module power supply

1 PWR GOOD LED When lit (green), all DC outputs and the AC input are within
operational limits.
2 FAULT LED When lit (yellow), one or all of the DC outputs or the AC
input is not within operational limits. This can be an
indication that the module power cord is not fully seated into
a power receptacle at either end, or that the main library
power switch is off.

Power distribution unit
NOTE: The EML 71e does not include a power distribution unit because you install it in your
own rack.
Figure 48 Controls and indicator on the PDU
Table 19 Controls and indicator on the PDU

1 Power LED When lit (red), shows power is applied to the unit. When
not lit, indicates the PDU is not receiving power.
2 PDU switch 1 When switched On, applies power to power strip 1.
3 PDU switch 2 When switched On, applies power to power strip 2.
4 Power strip power switch When set to I (On), applies power to the power strip. When
set to O (Off), removes power from the power strip.
Manual operations
The following sections describe manual procedures that you can do when you take the library
offline, power is lost, or the library is unresponsive.
Manually parking the robot

The robot must be parked before it can be removed from the library. A power failure or problems
with a robot component might prevent it from moving to a parked position.
1. Turn off the power to the library.
2. At the top of the library, pull off the robotics unit cover.
3. Manually open the center door of the library. Push the lever at the top of the door toward the
left and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Manually position the robot picker toward the front of the library. Reach inside the center door
and carefully pull the robot picker toward the front of the library.
CAUTION: Make sure the yellow gear lock is not in place before proceeding to the next
step.
5. Use the ratchet tool located on the front-right side of the robotics unit to move the robot upward.
The ratchet tool works by engaging a reduction gear while pulling the tool out and pushing
it in repeatedly to raise the table assembly.
6. When the table is near the parked position, make sure that the picker aligns correctly to enable
the final movement into the parked position.
Manual operations 53
7. After the robot is parked, push the ratchet tool all the way into the robotics until you feel it
engage it the back.
8. Retract the lift-flex cable by pulling the lift-flex retraction handle (see (page 54)) located on
the left side front panel of the robotics unit.
Figure 49 Robotics unit
1. Robotics unit 2. Lift-flex retraction handle

3. Ratchet tool 4. Robot picker
5. Lift suspension cable 6. Table assembly
7. Lift pole 8. Lift-flex cable
Manually opening the load port door

The load port door automatically opens when you enter the Operations →Unlock Load Ports
command on the operator control panel. If this operation is password protected, the password is
required to open the load port doors. If the door fails to open, you can open it manually by
Performing the following:
2. On the OCP, select the Operations →Unlock Door command to park the robot.
3. Turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise and open the center door of the
library.
NOTE: If the robot does not park, manually open the front door. Push the lever at the top of
the door to the left and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Inside the front door, reach toward the top-left of the load port door and push the door latch
to the right. The door opens.
Figure 50 Door latch on the load port door
Removing a tape cartridge from a tape drive

library.
3. Locate the tape drive with the tape cartridge that does not unload. Consult log errors or host
errors for the correct tape drive, or locate visually.
4. Press the Eject button and wait for the operation to complete, the tape to rewind, and the tape
cartridge to eject. If the tape cartridge does not eject, press and hold the Eject button for ten
seconds to force an eject.
CAUTION: Forcing an eject stops read and write operations and overrides host access
controls.
Figure 51 Front view of Ultrium tape drive
1. Eject button on Ultrium tape drive
5. Gently pull the tape cartridge from the tape drive.

6. Close the center door of the library and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise.
Manual operations 55
Removing a tape cartridge from the picker assembly
The picker assembly can be in any position when the library loses power. Before a tape cartridge
can be removed, the picker assembly must be facing the front left arrays and aligned with an
empty slot.
1. If the picker is facing the right:
a. Gently turn the picker to the left.
b. Slide the picker along the rail until it is positioned across from an empty slot close to you.
2. Turn the picker belt to extend the picker until the release screw is accessible.
Figure 52 Picker assembly
1. Picker belt and pulleys 2. Gripper

3. Release screw
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to turn the screw one-quarter turn clockwise until the tape
cartridge is released.
4. Push the tape cartridge into a slot.
5. Gently push the gripper back into the picker.
6. Slide the picker assembly toward the back of the library.
7. Remove the tape cartridge from the slot, or leave it there.

3 Troubleshooting and event reporting
This chapter describes how to solve problems you might encounter while operating the library.
For additional assistance with troubleshooting, use the online HP Guided Troubleshooting tool
which can be found at http://gts.houston.hp.com/gts.
Diagnostic support tools

The following tools are available to help you troubleshoot the library:
• Command View TL
• Library and Tape Tools
Command View TL version 1.5.5 or later provides SAN-related diagnostics for the major library
components such as interface controllers, tape drives, and robot. Only Command View TL can
generate support tickets for the interface controllers, the Interface Manager card, and the
management station. You should do all library firmware updates with Command View TL. To use
the Command View TL for library diagnostics, see the HP Interface Manager and Command View
TL User Guide.
Library and Tape Tools (L&TT) is installed on the host, which enables you to troubleshoot host
connectivity and performance. In addition, with L&TT you can:
• Identify all FC devices connected to your system.
• View detailed configuration, identification, inventory, and tape drive information for the library.
• Run advanced diagnostic tests, including connectivity, read/write, media validation, and
testing library functionality.
• View library and tape drive error logs.
• Generate a detailed support file that can be E-mailed or faxed to your support representative
for analysis.
The L&TT diagnostic provides an intuitive GUI with integrated context-sensitive help, and can be
downloaded free of charge. Go to http://www.hp.com/support/tapetools and select HP L&TT
Tool.
Troubleshooting
An incorrect installation or configuration can cause platform problems. In this case, the library
appears to be operating normally, but no data can be interchanged, or performance is poor. You
also could get an error code on the OCP. To identify an error caused by this type of problem,
check your installation and configuration setup.
General tape drive errors usually result from a miscommunication between a library processor and
a tape drive processor, tape drive and tape interaction issues, or a mechanical malfunction within
the library. Both platform problems and general tape drive errors display an error message or
event code on the OCP. Use the event codes listed later in this chapter to help determine a recovery
procedure.
The library depends on several other components to operate correctly. Errors that seem to be
caused by the library are often a result of issues on the host, the network cabling, or with the
application software. When troubleshooting the library, begin by ruling out these components.
Your application software may need to be reconfigured or, in some cases, reinstalled after you
have installed additional tape drives or slots into the library. Changing the number of load ports,
number of reserved slots, or type of tape drive, might require changes to software. Some application
software may require the purchase of additional add-on components or licenses when increasing
the number of storage slots or tape drives. Contact your application software provider for more
Diagnostic support tools 57

information, or if your application software does not recognize newly installed storage slots or
tape drives.
Command View TL should be the first tool used to diagnose a problem, followed by L&TT. These
two applications generally provide more detail than the OCP, but the OCP can be an aid in
determining the cause of errors. Support tickets from Command View TL or L&TT contain full log
events for all components. The OCP only shows summary information for robotic events. A support
ticket has to be generated to access the event logs.
Using the OCP, you can check the event log on the Status screen for the five most recent
informational, warning, or critical events. The last event listed on the screen is the most recent event
that occurred. Events have a date stamp, code numbers, a brief text description of the problem,
and usually a location of the module or slot where the error took place. The following is an example
of an OCP log event, and what information is included:
2005-04-06T10:07:57.068, 0.0.0.0.0, 3200, ifm, (null), error, 3000,
3312, "(re . . "
Code values are decoded with a support ticket from Command View TL and L&TT. This OCP
message decodes to:
Date/time, address, opstate, source, source, severity, activity, event ID or result, additional
information.
In this case, the opstate is Ifm is ok, the activity is Cartridge Move and result is Get Failed.
Refer to (page 232) for the meaning of operation state codes and activity codes.
For general troubleshooting, use the following table after you isolate your problem to a category
or specific area of the library, and then go to the reference mentioned that describes a corrective
action. If general troubleshooting or more specific troubleshooting with event codes does not fix
the problem, generate a support ticket and open an escalation case with your regional level 2
storage team to engage level 3 engineering.
Table 20 Fault isolation to a specific area
Problem area or category Where to find corrective action
Startup problems Go to (page 58)
OCP problems Go to (page 60)
Robotics problems Go to (page 60)
Operating problems Go to (page 62)
Tape drive problems Go to (page 62)
Interface Manager card problems Go to (page 64) and (page 65)
Interface controller problems Go to (page 66)
Startup problems
Table 21 Startup problems
Problem Corrective action
The library does not power on. Make sure that:

• The power cord is connected to a grounded electrical outlet.
• Each PDU power switch is on, as well as the switch on the power strips.

Table 21 Startup problems (continued)
• Power cords from PDU power strips are installed and seated.
• The library main power switch is on.
The library powers on but the robot • Check the connections of the Ethernet cable between the library robotics
does not move. controller and the Interface Manager card.
• If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP server
and the Interface Manager firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access
the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set network
config eml command until the command show mgmt rev does not
return an error code of 28. See Support Communication Engineering
Advisory The EML library can get stuck in an error state when being
assembled, set to default, or if the Interface Manager Flash is replaced
and does not have access to the DHCP server. .
• Make sure that the robot shipping restraints have been removed.
The library or tape drives are not • Check cable connections.

detected by the Interface Manager card
or Command View TL software. • Check the cabling. Make sure that all radial bends are greater than 5 cm
(2 inches) in diameter.
• Make sure that the tape drives and library are powered on and can be
seen by the OCP and hosts.
• Check that the FAULT LED on the tape drives are off.
• Check the log files for network problems.
• Make sure that the interface controllers are powered on and ready.
During initialization, the library robot • Use Command View TL or L&TT to generate a support ticket and check the
stops moving and the OCP status bar event log.
is red.
• Check the last entry in the critical error log on the OCP. Use the following
errors as examples in correcting the problem:
0100: Module # does not have RLP(2)
• Check power to the module number. Refer to the checks listed previously
under “The library does not power on.”
5501: Failed target calibration for MRC: X, X, X
• Make sure that nothing is obstructing the barcode reader.
• Make sure that the magazine is installed and seated properly.
• Check for defective magazine target markings.
0000: End of Text
• Open the library door and check the picker for a tape cartridge. If a
cartridge is present, remove the tape cartridge and place it into an empty
slot. Close the library door to start an inventory.
Opcode: 0514 (Robot needs to be reset)
• The library can fail to initialize if a tape is located on the floor. If unable
to use Command View TL or Telnet, disconnect the network connection and
reconnect.
One or more tape drives fail during • Check power supply indicator for power to the tape drive.
startup.
• Check that the tape drive is properly cabled and ready.
• Check the link indicators on the interface controllers for a valid link to the
tape drives.
• Check whether the FAULT indicator is lit on the back of the tape drive. If
so, diagnose the problem.
• Make sure the tape drive has the appropriate firmware.
Troubleshooting 59
Table 21 Startup problems (continued)
The OCP displays a yellow warning • Check cable connections.

and the Status→Health
Summary→Interface Manager screen • Check Interface Manager card and interface controller configurations.
indicates the Interface Manager card If problem persists:
is initializing.
• Reset the interface controller.
• Power cycle the library.
• Reset the default configuration on the interface controller.
OCP problems
Table 22 OCP problems
The OCP is blank. • Touch the OCP to wake it from sleep mode.
• Confirm that the power is on.
• Use Command View TL software or the Interface Manager CLI to check for
errors. See the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL User Guide.
The OCP does not respond to touch. • Make sure that the Ethernet cable is properly connected between the library
robotics controller PUBLIC port and the CASCADE port on the Interface
Manager card.
• Use Command View TL or the Interface Manager CLI to check for errors.
An error message appears on a red • Review latest error messages in the critical and warning event logs to help
OCP status bar. decipher the message and determine the cause.
A warning message is appears on a • Check the Health Status on the OCP to determine cause.
yellow OCP status bar.
• Review latest event details in the warning event log to determine the cause.
Robotics problems
Table 23 Robotics problems
The robot does not move at power on. • Make sure that all internal shipping restraints have been removed.
• Check that the library center door is closed.
• Review latest error messages in the critical and warning event logs to help
decipher the message and determine the cause.
The picker partially grips a tape • On the OCP, enter the Operations→Media Operations→Move Tape
cartridge. command to move the tape cartridge from the picker to an empty slot.
• Power cycle the library.
The barcode reader fails. Use the OCP to open the center door and:
• Make sure that nothing obstructs the reader.
• Make sure that nothing is obstructing the robot.
• Make sure that all tape cartridges are fully inserted into the storage slots
and no tapes are lying on the library floor.
• If barcode labels are required, check that approved labels are being used
and are correctly applied.

Table 23 Robotics problems (continued)
Close the center door to recalibrate the library.
The robot times out or hangs. • Make sure that nothing obstructs the robot.
• Retry the operation.
• Power cycle the library to recalibrate.
The robot fails during an operation. Review latest error messages in the critical and warning event logs to help
The robot drops a tape cartridge. • Use the OCP to open the center door. Retrieve the tape cartridge, position
it properly, and place the tape cartridge in an empty storage bin. (Do not
try to place the tape cartridge in the picker.)
• Close the doors to perform an inventory.
Troubleshooting 61
Operating problems
Table 24 Operating problems
The host computer cannot communicate • Make sure that Command View TL reports a green status for the library
with the library. and tape drives.
• Make sure that the host computer was added to the Secure Manager using
the Command View TL software, and was given access to library
components.
• Check library network configuration.
• Make sure that there is power to library components.
• Make sure that cable connections and termination are correct.
• Check that the interface controller is configured correctly for the SAN it is
attached to (for example, fabric or loop).
• Make sure that the interface controller link LEDs show activity.
• Restart the host and the library.
A tape cartridge (medium) is reported • Make sure that the designated tape cartridge is present and properly
not present. seated. (For a tape drive, make sure that the tape cartridge is completely
unloaded.) Then, retry the command.
• Make sure that the tape cartridge has good barcode labels, or that the
library is configured to not use labels.
• On the OCP, make sure Support→Service Menu+autoaudit is turned On.
If autoaudit is Off, the library does not do an inventory and therefore might
report storage slots with tape cartridges as being empty.
• Perform an inventory by opening and closing the center door.
A move command failed. • Review event logs for detailed information.

• Check the source and destination. The source should hold the tape cartridge
to be moved; the destination should be empty.
• Make sure that the picker is empty and that there are no obstructions.
• Retry the command.
Long inventory times. Use barcoded media and configure the library to use barcodes. Expect
inventory times ranging from 30 minutes for a 24U library to 1 hour for a
40U library with unlabeled media.
Redundant power supply warning. A warning indicates that the redundant power supply failed. Make sure that
there is AC power to the power supply. If it is receiving power, replace the
power supply.
Tape drive problems

IMPORTANT: For LTO4 or later tape drives, you must use FC port A to connect the tape drive to
the SAN unless you are using ETLA custom mapping in which case either port A or B can be used.
Table 25 Tape drive problems
The library is unable to communicate This is indicated by a Drive Communication Time-out error.
with a tape drive. • Tape drives added to new drive bays require a reboot.
• Check link indicators on the interface controllers (LTO2 and LTO3 tape
drives) or on the switch for the internal network (LTO4 and later tape drives).

Table 25 Tape drive problems (continued)
• Reseat the tape drive.

• Check tape drive status on the OCP and with Command View TL.
The tape drive does not eject a • Attempt the operation from the application software.
cartridge.
• Open the center door, reach in, and then press the Eject button on the tape
drive in question. If this fails, press and hold the Eject button for at least
ten seconds to force an eject.
• Power off the library, disconnect the FC cables, power on the library, open
the center door, and press and hold the Eject button on the tape drive in
question.
The tape drive reports a read/write • Try using a new tape.

error.
• Clean the tape drive.
• Run the tape drive assessment test using L&TT.
An LTO4 or later tape drive does not Some switch types require specific speed and topology settings. Try changing
link up the speed and topology settings with Command View TL or the Interface
Manager CLI.
• LTO4 and later tape drives have a default speed setting of auto negotiate.
Change the speed to 1Gb (LTO4 only), 2Gb, 4Gb, or 8Gb (LTO5 and
LTO6).
• LTO4 and later tape drives have a default auto negotiate topology setting
of loop-ptp which will try loop mode first, and then switch to point-to-point
if loop is not successful. Change the topology or mode setting to soft or
hard loop mode, or N_port mode which uses only point-to-point topology.
NOTE: Restoring the Interface Manager defaults with Command View TL or
the Interface Manager CLI will set the drive speed and topology back to the
auto negotiate settings.
Interface Manager card problems

In addition to the Command View TL GUI, the Interface Manager card can be managed through
a CLI. These CLI commands can be used to diagnose problems. You can access the CLI either
through a direct RS-232 serial connection or by using Telnet over the LAN. Refer to the HP Interface
Manager and Command View TL User Guide for instructions on using the CLI.
The following table describes common symptoms relating to the Interface Manager card and how
to resolve them. (page 65) provides more Interface Manager card fault isolation procedures through
the actions of LED indicators.
Troubleshooting 63
Table 26 Common Interface Manager card issues
Symptom Possible cause Solution
Command View TL server Bad network connection • Make sure that the Interface Manager card and the
does not detect the Interface management station are correctly connected to the LAN.
Manager card.
• Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet cabling ((page 47) and
(page 65)).
• Ping the Interface Manager card to make sure that the
network is healthy.
Interface Manager card • Power on the library. Observe status and link LEDs
not powered on or in ((page 47) and (page 65)).
ready state
• Check for proper version of firmware. See the HP Interface
Manager and Command View TL User Guide for
instructions.
Command View TL server Incorrect IPv4 address or Make sure the correct IPv4 or IPv6 address of the Interface
does not detect the Interface IPv6 Interface Identifier Manager card is entered in Command View TL.
Manager card (cont.). • See the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL
User Guide for information on using CLI commands to
make sure that the network IP address is correct.
• Configure Command View TL with the correct IP address.
See the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL
User Guide for information on adding a library or visit
http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl.
• See the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL
User Guide for information about adding the library to
Command View TL.
Interface Manager card does Bad network connection • Make sure that the Interface Manager card is properly
not detect one or more connected to the interface controllers and that the cables
interface controllers. are good.
• Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet cabling ((page 47) and
(page 65)).
Defective Interface • Observe status and link LEDs ((page 47)). Replace
Manager card or defective card or controller.
interface controller
Interface Manager card does Timing issues Reset the corresponding interface controller.
not detect tape drives or
library.
Tape drive not powered • Make sure the tape drive is not powered off.
on or in ready state
• Troubleshoot the tape drive.
Interface Manager card Possible ESD failure Reboot the library.

unresponsive, with link activity
light stuck on or off.
Message on OCP Improper settings Restore system defaults using CLI.

Status→Health
Summary→Interface Manager
screen shows warning that
Interface Manager card is
initializing.
Topology incomplete System interference Retry the command. This behavior can be expected if system
(Interface Manager card activity is high, because the Interface Manager commands
timed out when attempting have lower priority.
communication with interface
controllers).

Table 26 Common Interface Manager card issues (continued)
Symptom Possible cause Solution
Cabling Check cabling and observe indicators on the Interface

Manager card, interface controllers, and tape drives.
Configuration • Check each interface controller for active link LEDs to each
tape drive.
• Check that the number of tape drives reported by the
library matches the number of tape drives reported by the
Interface Manager card. Check each interface controller
for correct number of tape drives mapped. Reboot
mismatched interface controllers or tape drives, if needed.
Restore default configuration on mismatched interface
controllers and reboot.
• Disconnect Interface Manager card from interface
controllers and restore system defaults on the Interface
Manager card. Reconnect connections to interface
controllers and reboot.
• Swap tape drive locations to see if the problem follows
the tape drive, and replace the tape drive, if needed.
Command View TL does not Incompatible browser • Make sure that you are using a minimum of Microsoft
run in the browser. version or JavaTM Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or later, or Netscape Navigator
support not enabled 6.2 or later.
• Make sure that Java support is enabled in the browser.
Java Runtime Download and install the Java 2 Platform, Standard Edition
Environment (JRE) not 1.4.2 or later from http://wwws.java.com.
installed
Bad network connection • Check all physical network connections. If the connections
or network down are good, contact your network administrator.
• Ping the management station. If pinging fails and the IP
address is correct, contact your network administrator.
Wrong IP address • Check the IP address of the management station. On the

management station, open a command shell and enter
IPCONFIG. You must use this IP address (or the network
name of the management station) in the URL to access
Command View TL.
Management station not • Check to see if the management station is operational.

running, or Command
View TL service not • Use the Services applet to make sure that the Command
running on management View TL service is running on the management station.
station Select Start→Settings→Control Panel→Administrative
Tools→Services.
Table 27 Interface Manager card LED fault isolation

Indicators Procedures
Red LED Green LED
Blinks 1x per 5 second Off Reset the Interface Manager card (see (page 47)). If the problem
interval persists, replace the Interface Manager card.
Blinks 2x per 5 second Off

interval

interval
Troubleshooting 65
Table 27 Interface Manager card LED fault isolation (continued)
Indicators Procedures

interval
Off Blinks 1x per 5 second • Reset the Interface Manager card (see (page 47)).
interval
• If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP
server and the library firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access
the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set
network config eml. See Support Communication Engineering
Advisory The EML library can get stuck in an error state when
being assembled, set to default, or if the Interface Manager Flash
is replaced and does not have access to the DHCP server. .
• If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP
server and the library firmware is at an earlier version than 2.4,
use a valid service password to enter the IM CLI service mode then
use the set network config eml command. See Support
Communication Engineering Advisory The EML library can get
stuck in an error state when being assembled, set to default, or if
the Interface Manager Flash is replaced and does not have access
to the DHCP server.
• If the problem persists, replace the Interface Manager card.
Off Blinks 2x per 5 second Interface Manager card is in discovery mode. If problem persists, it
interval can be due to an incomplete topology. Refer to (page 64).
Off Blinks 3x per 5 second Processes are running. If the problem persists, check the configuration
interval and the IP address.
Interface controller problems

Most problems with the interface controller occur during the initial installation. Before proceeding
with advanced troubleshooting techniques, make sure that all connections are correct and review
the configuration and firmware. If a new interface controller was installed, the library may need
to be rebooted for the controller configuration to be set.
LED indicators
The LED indicators on the interface controllers (see (page 48) and (page 48)) are useful for
diagnosing various problems:
• FC port LEDs--Indicate FC activity (ACT) and link (LNK) status. If the link LED is not lit, it can
indicate a problem with an FC link. Make sure that the FC port configuration and cabling is
correct.
• Ethernet LEDs--Indicate activity and link status. If one of these indicators is not lit or stays
continuously lit, it can indicate a problem with the network connection or cabling. Make sure
that the network connection is correct. The port must be connected to a 10/100Base-T Ethernet
network to function properly.
Basic troubleshooting
Simplify the installation by reducing it to the most basic configuration. Then, add elements one at
a time, making sure that the library operates correctly after each step.
Basic troubleshooting includes making sure that the setup and connections are correct:
• The FC port connection
• The interface controller configuration
• Devices
• Host configuration

• HBA device driver information
• Serial port configuration
Each of these topics is discussed in the following sections.
Examining FC port connection

Most hubs and switches have link indicators showing link status. When the interface controller is
connected and powered on, the link indicator appears solid. If it is not, examine the cabling or
connections.
To examine links:
• Make sure that the library is not running any tasks before disconnecting any cables. Disconnect
and reconnect the FC cable. This procedure causes momentary activity of this indicator as the
link reinitializes.
• Make sure that the cable type for the interface controller and the attached hub, HBA, or switch
are similar.
NOTE: By default, the FC port speed is set to 2 Gbps for the e2400-FC 2Gb interface
controller and to 4 Gbps for the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller. Changes to the FC port
speed must be manually set, such as for 1 Gbps. If set incorrectly and the interface controller
is plugged into a Loop or Fabric, the unit can receive framing errors, which can be found in
the trace logs; the fiber link light will be off because of the incorrect FC link speed.
Examining the interface controller configuration

To examine the interface controller configuration, make sure that:
• The interface controller speed is set correctly.
• The connection type is set correctly.
• The host is added to Secure Manager in Command View TL and given permission to
communicate with the library.
Examining devices
HP recommends using Command View TL to make sure that the devices are operating correctly.
Examining the host configuration

In some cases, the FC HBA or host device driver may not be working properly. Check the
configuration of these elements.
Check the release notes for the device driver to see if there are any specific issues or a required
configuration. Also, make sure that you are using the current version of the HBA driver.
Older applications can have expectations about what constitutes a valid SCSI ID, and thus may
not correctly handle certain mappings. This is not an issue for the operating system or most
applications. However, some applications may exhibit difficulties addressing target IDs greater
than 15 (16 and higher). To resolve this situation in a direct-attach configuration, configure the
interface controller to use hard addressing and set the AL_PA to a value that the HBA can map,
with an ID less than 16.
Examining HBA device driver information

Review the HBA device driver Readme.txt file for configuration specifics. An HBA may require
a different configuration. HBAs typically come with utility programs to view or change their
configurations.
Troubleshooting 67
Examining serial port configuration
If you have problems connecting to the serial interface, make sure that the configuration of the
terminal or terminal emulation program is correct.
Table 28 Terminal configuration settings
Attribute Setting
BAUD Rate Autobaud, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 1152001
Data Bits 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity None
Flow Control None or XON/XOFF

1
Default setting
If problems persist, examine the cabling.

If a valid Ethernet IP address is configured, serial configuration settings can also be set using Telnet.
Event reporting
The tables in this section are grouped into categories of event codes. The codes are listed
sequentially from table to table to enable you to quickly find one. Each table lists the event code
ID, the suspect field replaceable unit (FRU) list of what components may be at fault, and how to
further isolate that component. (page 68) lists the event code categories, the range of event IDs,
and where the table for the event category begins.
Table 29 Event code categories and location
Range of event IDs Code category Table location
0000-1099 Library robotics controller (page 69)
1100--3299 SCSI (page 70)
3300--3499 IFM (page 71)
3500--3699 Diagnostic (page 76)
3700--3799 Miscellaneous (page 94)
3800--3899 SNMP (page 92)
3900--3999 Service (page 93)
4000--4999 Miscellaneous (page 94)
5000--5399 Robot (page 95)
5400--5499 Scan (page 103)
5500--5599 Target (page 104)
5600--6399 CMO (page 105)
6400--6999 Tape drive (page 109)
7001--7999 Configuration (page 120)
8000--8999 Environmental (page 120)

Library robotics controller events
Table 30 Library robotics controller events
Event ID Suspect FRUs Isolation procedure
0000 None No action required.

OK
0001 Library robotics controller 1. Recheck your command.

Command line parse 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
failure
0100 Library robotics controller Check your applications.

Application not ready
0101 Library robotics controller Check your applications.

Application task not ready
0102 Library robotics controller 1. Reboot the library.

Application task failure 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.

Logical fault - the start() 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
method must run before
other firmware methods

Failed to open temporary 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
file for accumulating
download data

Failed to write data to 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
temporary file

Failed to close temporary 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
file after data transfer
0304 Library robotics controller 1. Retry the download.

Failed to apply the 2. Reboot the library.
transferred firmware data 3. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
to non-volatile memory

Failed to stat() an 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
expected/specified file to
fulfill a size query

The transferred or 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
header-encoded file size
didn't match the actual file
size

The image failed CRC 2. If problem persists, replace the library robotics controller.
check after being written to
non-volatile memory
Event reporting 69
SCSI events
Table 31 SCSI events
1100=SCSI NOOP None No isolation procedure.

Requested action not
needed
1101=SCSI FAILED Software 1. Issue LUN reset task management function (from host).
Requested action failed 2. Reset transport layer from the host, retry operation.
3. Unplug and plug in fiber optic cable.
4. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
command to reboot the library.
1102=SCSI DRIVER ERROR Software 1. Reset transport layer from the host, retry operation.
Error executing driver 2. Unplug and plug in Fibre cable.
request 3. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
1103=SCSI SYSTEM Hardware configuration 1. Check for heterogeneous hardware. An invalid

ERROR configuration would be FC and SCSI together.
System error occurred - 2. This event suggests that no SCSI host bus adapter was
application, hardware detected. Ignore this event on the library.
configuration, or OS
1104=SCSI PROGRAM Software Collect logs or support ticket.

ERROR
Encountered a situation
which should never occur
1105=SCSI_TASK_ None Check that host application timeouts are not set too short.
ABORTED
Task was aborted
1106=SCSI_REJECTED Host software No library isolation procedure. Host software is attempting

Requested action from host an unsupported task management function.
rejected
1107=SCSI_RESTART_ Software 1. Collect logs or L&TT support ticket.

INTERFACE 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
Interface needs to be command to reboot the library.
restarted 3. If problem persists after reboot, hardware is at fault.
1108=SCSI_TASK_ None No isolation procedure required. This is normal operation.

COMPLETED
Task completed
1109=SCSI_NOT_ALLOWED None No isolation procedure required. This is normal operation.

Requested action not
allowed

IFM events
Table 32 IFM events
3300=IFM_ UNKNOWN Firmware 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

Unexpected error 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
3301=IFM_RESOURCE_ Robotics firmware 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

FAIL 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
User command could not command to reboot the library.
be sent
3302=IFM_CONTENT_FAIL None--check media Check event ID 3304 for action required.

Content failure for a
request or function call
3303=IFM_NON_EXISTENT_ None--check source tape Check event ID 3304 for action required.
SOURCE_DRIVE drive access
Source drive requested is
not configured
3304=IFM_NON_EXISTENT_ None--check destination 1. Check address of tape drive. If correct, continue to the
DEST_DRIVE tape drive access next step.
Destination drive requested 2. Visually check for tape drive. If present, continue to next
is not configured step.
3. Visually check that tape drive bezel is still in place. If
present, continue to next step.
4. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
5. Issue tape drive state command
• Check health of all tape drives from OCP.
• If problem persists, continue to next step.
6. Insert a different tape drive.
7. Issue tape drive status command.
• Check health of all tape drives from OCP. If problem
goes away, replace the tape drive.
• If problem persists, replace robot.
3305=IFM_INOP Robotics firmware 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

Encountered inop condition 2. Scan for error IFM_INOP.
3. Once error is found, look back in time for INOP indication.
4. Once INOP condition is found, determine source of INOP
condition and attempt to clear.
5. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
3306=IFM_USER_REQUEST_ Firmware None--event ID is not used.

FAIL
User command request
failed to get sent
3307=IFM_USER_RESPONSE_ Firmware 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

FAIL 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
User command response command to reboot the library.
returned failure
3308=IFM_MOVE_NON_ None See event ID 3309 for isolation procedure.

EXISTENT_SOURCE
Event reporting 71
Table 32 IFM events (continued)
Source address does not

exist
3309=IFM_MOVE_SOURCE_ None 1. Check source address. If it is a SCSI address, addresses

EMPTY are shifted by the number of reserved cells.
Source location is empty 2. If address is correct, collect traces and reboot.
3310=IFM_MOVE_NON_ None See event ID 3311 for isolation procedure.

EXISTENT_DESTINATION
Destination address does
not exist
3311=IFM_MOVE_ None 1. Check destination address. If it is a SCSI address,

DESTINATION_FULL addresses are shifted by the number of reserved cells.
Destination address is 2. If address is correct, collect traces and reboot.
occupied
3312=IFM_MOVE_GET_FAIL • Robot 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

Get failed 2. Find the event ID IFM_MOVE_GET in the logs and get the
• Magazine
failing address.
3. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Media
Operations→Move Tape command to move the tape
cartridge to and from the failing address, or run demo
looping.
4. If diagnostics pass, collect logs and support ticket. If
diagnostics fail, use the diagnostic error code to continue
the investigation.
5. Replace robot.
3313=IFM_MOVE_PUT_FAIL • Robot 1. Check that the destination slot is empty.

Put failed 2. Collect logs or support ticket.
• Magazine
3. Find the event ID IFM_PUT_FAIL in the logs and get the
failing address.
4. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Media
looping.
the investigation.
6. Replace robot.
3314=IFM_MOVE_LOAD_FAIL • Tape drive firmware 1. Collect logs or support ticket.

Drive load failed 2. Find the event ID IFM_MOVE_LOAD_FAIL in the logs and
• Magazine
get the failing address.
• Robot 3. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Media
looping.
the investigation.
5. Replace robot.
3315=IFM_MOVE_UNLOAD_ Tape drive firmware 1. Visually check cartridge. Did the cartridge eject past the
FAIL cartridge present sensor? If so, try pushing the cartridge
Drive unload failed back into the tape drive.
2. Check for improper barcode labeling.
3. If cartridge is not seated or present, replace tape drive.

3316=IFM_MOVE_DRIVE_NOT_ • Tape drive firmware 1. Check address of tape drive. If correct, continue to next
PRESENT step.
• Library robotics
Drive not present 2. Visually check for a tape drive. If present, continue to next
controller
step.
3. Visually check that tape drive bezel is in place. If present,
continue to next step.
4. Initialize tape drive. Issue the OCP service/drive reboot
command.
5. Check health of all tape drives on OCP. If command fails,
replace the tape drive.
6. Check health of tape drive on OCP. If problem goes away,
the tape drive was bad. If problem persists, replace the
library robotics controller.
3317=IFM_MOVE_BAD_DRIVE_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Initialize tape drive. On the OCP, enter the
STATE Support→Service Menu→Reboot Drive command.
• Firmware
Bad drive state for move 2. Check health of tape drive on OCP. If command fails,
3318=IFM_MOVE_MEDIA_ • Media 1. From the OCP, move the cartridge to another tape drive.
ERROR 2. If the problem persists, replace the cartridge. Otherwise,
• Tape drive
Media error continue to next step.
• Firmware 3. Check health of tape drive on OCP to determine whether
tape drive needs cleaning. Clean tape drive if indicated.
Otherwise, continue to next step.
4. Try another cartridge in the original tape drive. If problem
persists, replace the tape drive.
3319=IFM_MOVE_SOURCE_ • Load port door 1. Visually check load port for an open door. If open, close
LOADPORT_OPEN and retry operation.
• Load port sensor
Source location Load Port 2. Press each load port door. If you hear a click, door was
open not closed; retry operation. If you did not hear a click,
3. Try to open load port through OCP, then close door. If
operation still fails, collect logs and support ticket.
3320=IFM_MOVE_DESTINATION_ • Load port door 1. Visually check load port for an open door. If open, close
LOADPORT_OPEN and retry operation.
• Load port sensor
Destination location Load 2. Press each load port door. If you hear a click, door was
Port open not closed; retry operation. If you did not hear a click,
3. Try to open load port through OCP, then close door. If
operation still fails, collect logs and support ticket.
3321=IFM_MOVE_RESERVE_ Firmware 1. Check address.

FAIL 2. See if there is a conflict. If not, recheck address (remember
Failure during reservation to take reserved cells into account when address is SCSI).
Collect traces and support ticket. If there is a conflict, issue
a reboot command from the OCP.
3322=IFM_MOVE_CART_ Robot 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

IN_ HAND 2. Scan logs for IFM_MOVE_CART_IN_HAND error.
Cartridge in hand 3. When error is found, look back in time for an INOP
indication.
4. If INOP condition is found, determine source of condition
and attempt to clear.
Event reporting 73
3323=IFM_MOVE_SOURCE_ Load port magazine 1. Open all load port doors configured as import/export
LOADPORT_MAGAZINE_ using the OCP.
MISSING 2. See if all load port magazines are present. If present,
Source location Load Port replace the magazine indicated as missing. If one or more
magazine missing magazines are missing, then insert magazines.
3. Check that load port or magazines have good target
indicators.
3324=IFM_MOVE_DESTINATION_ Load port magazine 1. Open all load port doors configured as import/export
LOADPORT_MAGAZINE_ using the OCP.
MISSING 2. See if all load port magazines are present. If present,
Destination location Load replace the magazine indicated as missing. If one or more
Port magazine missing magazines are missing, then insert magazines.
3325=IFM_SOURCE_DRIVE_ • Tape drive See event ID 3326 for isolation procedure.

NOT_AVAILABLE
• Robot (serial port)
Source drive requested is
not available
3326=IFM_DEST_DRIVE_NOT_ • Tape drive 1. Check for good target indicators on tape drive bezel.
AVAILABLE 2. Initialize tape drive. Issue an OCP service/reboot tape
• Robot (serial port)
Destination drive requested drive command.
is not available 3. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
4. Issue a command to load tape drive. If command fails,
5. If problem persists, replace robot.
3327=IFM_DIAG_NO_CARTRIDGE_ • Tape cartridge 1. Check for cartridge.

AVAILABLE 2. Check library inventory with OCP.
• Firmware
No cartridge available for 3. If cartridge list is empty, insert a cartridge.
diagnostic use 4. Reissue a diagnostic command. If error occurs, firmware
is at fault. Collect logs and support ticket.
3328=IFM_DIAG_NO_ • Tape cartridge This event should not occur. If this event does occur, generate
DIAGNOSTIC_CARTRIDGE_ a support ticket and notify HP.
AVAILABLE • Firmware
No diagnostic cartridge
available or not in reserved
cell location
3329=IFM_DIAG_CARTRIDGE_ • Tape cartridge This event should not occur. If this event does occur, generate
IS_NOT_DIAGNOSTIC_ a support ticket and notify HP.
CARTRIDGE • Firmware
Not a diagnostic cartridge

or not in reserved cell
location
3330=IFM_DIAG_NO_ • Tape cartridge This event should not occur. If this event does occur, generate
CARTRIDGE_AT_THIS_ a support ticket and notify HP.
LOCATION • Firmware
No cartridge at this
location
3331=IFM_DIAG_ • Tape cartridge Do a check of the library inventory on the OCP. Make sure
CARTRIDGE_IS_NOT_ that the cartridge selected is not a cleaning cartridge. If it is
CORRECT_TYPE • Firmware a cleaning cartridge, select another one. If it is not a cleaning
cartridge, collect the logs.

Cartridge is not correct

type
3332=IFM_DIAG_NO_EMPTY_ • No empty cell available This event should not occur. If this event does occur, generate
DESTINATION_CELL_FOUND a support ticket and notify HP.
• Firmware
No empty destination cell
found
3333=IFM_DRIVE_GET_ • Tape drive assembly Check the tape drive health on the OCP.
CONFIG_FAILED • If health is good, no further action is required.
• Firmware
Get Drive Configuration
• If the tape drive health command fails, issue a
Failed
service/reboot command.
3334=IFM_INCOMPATIBLE_ Tape cartridge 1. Make sure tape cartridge has correct label for type of
CART_FOR_DRIVE cartridge.
Source cartridge is 2. Check destination tape drive type, and replace tape
incompatible with cartridge or label if incorrect.
destination drive
3335=IFM_DRIVE_ Tape cartridge 1. Make sure tape cartridge has correct label for type of
CLEANING cartridge.
Cartridge move is restricted 2. Check destination tape drive type, and replace tape
for this cartridge type cartridge or label if incorrect.
3336=IFM_INCOMPATIBLE_ None Check command.

CART_FOR_MOVE
Cartridge move is restricted
for this cartridge type
3337=IFM_NO_COM None Insert cleaning cartridge of the same type.

PATIBLE_
CLEAN_CARTRIDGE
No compatible cleaning
cartridge for this drive type
3338=IFM_CLEAN_ Cleaning cartridge Replace cleaning cartridge.

CARTRIDGE_EXPIRED
Cleaning cartridge has
expired
3339=IFM_EMPTY_LOADPORT_ None Empty a load port slot.

CELL_NOT_FOUND
No empty load port cells
remain
3340=IFM_CART_IS_NOT_ None Select correct cartridge.

CLN_OR_DIAG
Selected cartridge is not a
cleaning or diagnostic
cartridge
3341=IFM_DIAG_ONE_OR_ None Move cartridges from corner slots.

MORE_CORNERS_SKIPPED
Corners test failed. One or
more corners occupied.
3342=IFM_DIAG_LOADPORT_ None No action.

CELL_SKIPPED
All load port cells
occupied, skipped test
Event reporting 75
3343=IFM_DIAG_ONE_OR_ None Empty all drives and retest.

MORE_DRIVES_SKIPPED
All drives test failed one or
more drives occupied
3499 None No action.

IFM last error entry
Diagnostic events
Any diagnostic failure leaves the library in the maintenance mode. Only a successful diagnostic
completion (from any diagnostic) will clear the maintenance mode library state. These events only
occur during a library test, and may not indicate that the library has failed.
Table 33 Diagnostic events
3500=DIAGNOSTIC_FAILED Firmware 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

Unexpected error 2. Rerun the diagnostics. If diagnostics fail, reboot. If
diagnostics pass, it was a transient error condition.
3501=DIAGNOSTIC_ODS_ Firmware 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

INVALID_INSTANTIATION 2. Rerun the diagnostics. If diagnostics fail, reboot the library.
Diagnostic InProgress If diagnostics pass, it was a transient error condition.
object invalid
3502=DIAGNOSTIC_ Firmware (only if condition 1. Diagnostic might already be in progress from another
ALREADY_INPROGRESS persists) login.
Diagnostic already in 2. If support CLI is open, close session, and retry test.
progress 3. If the error persists, collect the logs and reboot the library.
3503=DIAGNOSTIC_UNABLE_ Firmware 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

TO_GET_OBJECT 2. Rerun the diagnostics. If diagnostics fail, reboot the library.
Unable to get diagnostic If diagnostics pass, it was a transient error condition.
InProgress object
3504=DIAGNOSTIC_UNABLE_ Unknown 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

TO_CHANGE_LIBRARY_STATE 2. Rerun the diagnostics. If diagnostics fail, reboot the library.
Unable to put library into If diagnostics pass, it was a transient error condition.
maintenance mode
3505=DIAGNOSTIC_THREAD_ Firmware 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

CREATION_FAILED 2. Reboot the library.
Diagnostic thread creation
failed
3506=DIAGNOSTIC_PROC_ • Power supply See event ID 3512.

FILE_OPEN_FAILURE
Unable to open file in proc controller
filesystem
• Firmware
3507=DIAGNOSTIC_PROC_ None None, event ID is no longer used.

SERVO_FAILED
Proc file indicates servo
failure

SERVO_CNTL_STATUS_FAILED

Table 33 Diagnostic events (continued)
Proc file indicates servo

control status failure

DRIVE_FAILURE
Proc file indicates drive
failure
3510=DIAGNOSTIC_PROC_ • Library robotics 1. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library

RTC_FAILED controller command to reboot the library.
Proc file indicates real time • Firmware 2. Replace the library robotics controller.
clock battery failure

FPGA_FAILURE
Proc file indicates FPGA
failure
3512=DIAGNOSTIC_PROC_ • Power supply 1. Make sure that all the library modules have power. All
FILE_EMPTY modules must have power at bootup.
Reading the proc file 2. If one or more modules do not have power, replace the
controller
returned a NULL failed power supply, reboot, and rerun the diagnostic.
• Firmware
• If the problem persists, go to step 3.
• If the diagnostic passes, the problem is resolved.
3. Replace the library robotics controller, reboot the library,
and rerun the diagnostic.
• If the problem persists, open an escalation case with
your regional level 2 storage team to engage level 3
engineering.
3513=DIAGNOSTIC_PROC_FILE_ Firmware 1. Collect traces.

TOKEN_MISSING 2. Rerun diagnostics.
NULL returned when token • If the problem persists, reboot the library.
was expected
• If the diagnostic passes, an intermittent problem was
encountered.
3. Reboot the library.
4. Rerun diagnostics.
engineering.
• If the diagnostic passes, an intermittent problem was
encountered.
Event reporting 77
3514=DIAGNOSTIC_SYSTEM_ • Firmware 1. Retry the diagnostic.

MODULE_NOT_PRESENT • If the diagnostic passes, it was a transient failure.
• 8U base module
System module not found backplane • If the diagnostic fails, go to next step.
• Library robotics 2. Reboot the library.
controller 3. Retry the diagnostic. If failure persists, replace the library
robotics controller.
5. Retry the diagnostic. If failure persists, replace the 8U base
module backplane.
3515=DIAGNOSTIC_ROBOT_ • Robot 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

NOT_PRESENT 2. Visually check for presence of robot.
Robot not present controller • If robot is missing, install one.
• Firmware • If robot is present, replace the library robotics
controller.
4. Rerun the diagnostic.
• If the diagnostic fails, collect traces, and open an
escalation case with your regional level 2 storage team
to engage level 3 engineering.
• If diagnostic passes, the problem is resolved.
3516=DIAGNOSTIC_ • Library robotics On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library command
IDCARD_NOT_PRESENT controller to reboot the library. If problem persists, replace the library
IDCARD not present robotics controller.
• Firmware
3517=DIAGNOSTIC_RLC_MASTER_ • Library robotics 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

ENABLE_ERROR controller 2. Reboot the library.
RLC master enable error • Firmware 3. Rerun diagnostic.
detected • If the diagnostic fails, collect traces, and replace the
5. Rerun diagnostic.
• If the diagnostic fails, open an escalation case with
engineering.
3518=DIAGNOSTIC_BRAKE_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

FAULT_DETECTED controller
Control Status: brake fault • Robot
detected
• 8U base module
backplane
3519=DIAGNOSTIC_12V_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

POWER_NOT_OK controller
Control Status: 12v Power • Robot
not ok
• 8U base module
backplane
3520=DIAGNOSTIC_SERVO_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

VOLTAGE_LOW controller

Control Status: servo • Robot

voltage low
• 8U base module
backplane
3521=DIAGNOSTIC_CABLE_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

SLACK controller
Control Status: cable slack • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane
3522=DIAGNOSTIC_REACH_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

SAFE controller
Control Status: reach safe • Robot
error
• 8U base module
backplane
3523=DIAGNOSTIC_PROX_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

DETECT controller
Control Status: proc detect • Robot
error
• 8U base module
backplane
3524=DIAGNOSTIC_GRIP_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

FAULT controller
Grip fault detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

PHASE_ERROR controller
Grip phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

HALL_ERROR controller
Grip phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane
3527=DIAGNOSTIC_GRIP_AMP • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

_ENABLE_ERROR controller
Grip amp enable error • Robot
detected
• 8U base module
backplane
3528=DIAGNOSTIC_WRIST_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

FAULT controller
Wrist fault detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

Event reporting 79
Wrist phase error detected • Robot

• 8U base module
backplane

Wrist phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

AMP_ENABLE_ERROR controller
Wrist amp enable error • Robot
detected
• 8U base module
backplane

FAULT controller
Reach fault detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

Reach phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

Reach phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

Reach amp enable error • Robot
detected
• 8U base module
backplane
3536=DIAGNOSTIC_TRACK_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

FAULT controller
Track fault detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane

Track phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane


Track phase error detected • Robot

• 8U base module
backplane

Track amp enable error • Robot
detected
• 8U base module
backplane
3540=DIAGNOSTIC_Z_FAULT • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

Z fault detected controller
• Robot
• 8U base module
backplane
3541=DIAGNOSTIC_Z_PHASE_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

ERROR controller
Z phase error d0etected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane
3542=DIAGNOSTIC_Z_HALL_ • Library robotics See event ID 3543.

ERROR controller
Z phase error detected • Robot
• 8U base module
backplane
3543=DIAGNOSTIC_Z_AMP_ • Library robotics 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

ENABLE_ERROR controller 2. Rerun the diagnostic.
Z amp enable error • Robot • If the diagnostic fails, reboot the library (step 3).
detected
• 8U base module • If the diagnostic passes, an intermittent problem was
backplane encountered.
• If the diagnostic fails, replace the library robotics
controller.
• If the diagnostic fails, place original library robotics
controller back into library, and replace robot.
• If the diagnostic fails, place robot back into library,
and replace 8U base module backplane.
engineering.
Event reporting 81
3544=DIAGNOSTIC_DRIVE_ • Tape drive 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

NOT_PRESENT 2. See if the tape drive is present.
Drive not present controller • If the tape drive is present, reboot the library.
• 8U base module • If the tape drive is missing, replace the tape drive, and
backplane reboot the library.
• If the problem persists, place the original tape drive
back into the library and replace the library robotics
controller.
• If the problem persists, place the original library
robotics controller back into the library, and replace
the 8U base module backplane card.
engineering.
3545=DIAGNOSTIC_DRIVE_ • Tape drive 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

FAN_FAILURE 2. See if the tape drive fan has failed. If the fan has stopped,
Drive fan failure detected replace the tape drive assembly.
controller
• 8U base module NOTE: The fan might be running below threshold.
backplane 3. If the fan is running, rerun the diagnostic.
• If the problem persists, replace the tape drive assembly.
• If the problem persists, place the original tape drive
assembly back into the library, and replace the library
robotics controller.
• If the problem persists, place the original library
robotics controller back into the library, and replace
the 8U base module backplane.
engineering.
10. Collect logs and support ticket.

3546=DIAGNOSTIC_DRIVE_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Make sure that the tape drive fault LED is active.
FAULT_LED_ACTIVE • If the LED is active, replace the tape drive.
Drive fault LED active controller • If the LED is not active, check the tape drive state (step
• Firmware 2).
2. Check state of tape drive health on OCP.
• If state indicates a fault, or a not present condition,
• If the state is online, reboot the library (step 3).
4. See if the fault LED is off.
• If fault LED is on, replace the tape drive.
• If fault LED is off, rerun the diagnostic. If the diagnostic
fails, open an escalation case with your regional level
2 storage team to engage level 3 engineering.
3547=DIAGNOSTIC_NO_ • Tape drive 1. Make sure that all the tape drives have active fault LEDs.
FUNCTIONAL_DRIVE_FOUND • If one or more tape drives do not have lit fault LEDs,
• Firmware
No functional drive found continue to step 2.
• If all tape drives have lit fault LEDs, replace the tape
drives, and continue with step 2.
engineering.
3548=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Door sensor 1. See if the library door is open or closed.

SENSOR_FAILURE_DOOR_OPEN • If closed, replace the door sensor.
Door sensor failure: Door controller • If open, close the door, and wait for inventory to
open
• Firmware complete.
• If the problem persists, replace the library robotics
controller.
3549=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Door sensor 1. See if the library door is open or closed.

SENSOR_FAILURE_DOOR_CLOSED • If open, replace the door sensor.
Door sensor failure: Door controller • If closed, rerun the diagnostic (step 2).
closed
• Firmware 2. Rerun the diagnostic.
controller.
3550=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Library robotics See event ID 3553 for isolation procedure.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_SHOULD_ controller
BE_ON
• Firmware
Event reporting 83
Door Open LED Failure:

LED should be on
3551=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Library robotics 1. Rerun diagnostic.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_SHOULD_ controller • If problem persists, go to step 2.
BE_OFF
• Firmware • If the diagnostic passes, the problem is resolved.
LED should be off 2. Reboot the library.
controller and go to step 4.
engineering.
3552=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Library robotics See event ID 3553 for isolation procedure.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_NOT_ controller
ON_OR_FLASHING
• Firmware
LED should be on or
flashing
3553=DIAGNOSTIC_DOOR_ • Library robotics 1. Reboot the library.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_NOT_ controller 2. Rerun the diagnostic.
FLASHING
• Firmware • If the problem persists, replace the library robotics
Door Open LED Failure: controller.
LED should be flashing
engineering.

TO_RETURN_LIBRARY_TO_READY 2. Reboot the library.
Unable to return library to 3. Rerun any diagnostic.
ready state. • If the problem persists, open an escalation case with
engineering.

TO_CLEAR_DIAG_IN_PROGRESS_ 2. Reboot the library.
FLAG 3. Rerun any diagnostic.
Unable to clear the • If the problem persists, open an escalation case with
diagnostic in progress flag. your regional level 2 storage team to engage level 3
engineering.

3556=DIAGNOSTIC_TIME_ None This event ID should not occur with the library.
OUT
Diagnostic Timed Out.
3557=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ None None.

SENSOR_FAILURE_LOADPORT_
OPEN
LOAD PORT sensor failure:
LOAD PORT open
3558=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ None None.

CLOSED
LOAD PORT closed
Event reporting 85
3559=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Sensors 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_SHOULD_ 2. Reboot the library.
BE_ON • Load port latch
3. If the diagnostic fails:
LOAD PORT Open LED • Library robotics
controller • If no load ports are configured as import/export,
Failure: LED should be on configure at least one this way, and retry the
diagnostic.
• If there is at least one load port configured as
import/export, watch the robot open the load port.
Does the load port open? If not, check the load port
latch. If the load port opens, replace the library robotics
controller.
3560=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Load port sensors 1. Make sure that all load ports are closed.
OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_SHOULD_ • If one or more load ports are not closed, close them,
BE_OFF • Library robotics
controller and rerun the diagnostic.
LOAD PORT Open LED
• If all load ports are closed, continue to next step.
Failure: LED should be off
2. Rerun the diagnostic. If the diagnostic fails, replace the
load port sensor.
3. Rerun the diagnostic. If the error persists, replace the
3561=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Sensors 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_NOT_ 2. Rerun the diagnostic.
ON_OR_FLASHING • LED
• If no load ports are configured as import/export,
configure at least one this way, and retry the
Failure: LED should be on controller
diagnostic.
or flashing
controller.
3562=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Sensor 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

OPEN_LED_FAILURE_LED_NOT_ 2. Rerun the diagnostic.
FLASHING • LED
• If the diagnostic fails, make sure that at least one load
port is configured as import/export.
Failure: LED should be controller
flashing • If no load ports are configured as import/export,
configure at least one this way, and retry the
diagnostic.
controller.
3563=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ Firmware 1. Collect logs and support ticket.

INFO_UNAVAILABLE 2. Rerun the diagnostic. If the diagnostic fails as before,
LOAD PORT Info reboot the library.
Unavailable to Diagnostics 3. Rerun the diagnostic.
engineering.
3564=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Load port sensor See event ID 3569.

1_OPEN • Firmware


LOAD PORT 1 open

2_OPEN • Firmware

LOAD PORT 2 open

3_OPEN • Firmware

LOAD PORT 3 open

4_OPEN • Firmware

LOAD PORT 4 open

5_OPEN • Firmware

LOAD PORT 5 open
3569=DIAGNOSTIC_ • Load port sensor 1. Make sure that all load port doors are closed.
LOADPORT_SENSOR_ • If one or more are open, close them, and wait for
FAILURE_LOADPORT_6_ • Firmware
inventory to finish.
OPEN
• If all load port doors are closed, replace load port
sensor for the door indicated.
LOAD PORT 6 open
2. Rerun the diagnostics.
• If the diagnostics pass with a new sensor, the problem
is resolved.
• If the diagnostics pass without a new sensor, it was a
transient condition (load port door might have been
left open too long during test).
• If the diagnostics fail with the message LOAD PORT
Door State is not closed , diagnostics
will not start. One or more LOAD PORT
doors is open or LOAD PORT Audit is in
progress:
◦ If an inventory is in progress, wait until inventory is

done and retry the command.
◦ If an inventory is not in progress, replace the sensor

indicated.

1_CLOSED • Firmware

LOAD PORT 1 closed

Event reporting 87

LOAD PORT 2 closed


LOAD PORT 3 closed


LOAD PORT 4 closed


LOAD PORT 5 closed
3575=DIAGNOSTIC_LOADPORT_ • Load port sensor 1. Rerun the diagnostic. Make sure that none of the load port
SENSOR_FAILURE_LOADPORT_ doors are blocked.
• If diagnostic passes, the problem is resolved.
• If the diagnostic fails, continue to next step.
LOAD PORT 6 closed
2. Make sure that the indicated load port door is closed.
• If the door is closed, then check the door latch. If the
latch is stiff, replace or adjust it.
• If the door is open, replace the senor.
• If the diagnostics pass with a new sensor, the problem
is resolved.
• If the diagnostics pass after adjusting or replacing the
latch, the problem is resolved.
• If the diagnostic fails, collect traces.
3576 Power Supply Power supply 1. Check power cables and PDUs
Failure: module 1, supply 2. Replace power supply.
1
3577 Power Supply Power supply See event ID 3576.

Failure: module 1, supply
2

1

2

1

2


1

2

1

2

1

2
3588 Power supply Power supply See event ID 3576.

degraded: module 4,
supply 1
3589 Power supply Power supply See event ID 3576.

degraded: module 4,
supply 2
3699 Diagnostic last error None No action.

entry
Event reporting 89
Miscellaneous library events
Table 34 Miscellaneous events
Event ID Suspect FRU Isolation procedure
3700=LIBRARY_SYSTEM_ Firmware 1. Collect traces.

RESOURCE_FAILURE 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
Library system resource command to reboot the library.
failed
3701=LIBRARY_UNABLE_TO_ • Robot 1. Open library door.

MOVE_CARTRIDGE_TO_SOURCE 2. Check the picker.
• Missing load port
Library unable to move magazine 3. If the destination is a magazine, make sure that the
cartridge to source magazine is correctly seated.
• Firmware
4. If the destination is a tape drive, check the tape drive
bezel, and replace if it has fallen off.
5. Check cartridge.
• If properly in picker, close door and reboot.
• If not properly in picker, remove cartridge.
6. Reboot.
3702=LIBRARY_CARTRIDGE_ • Robot 1. Open library door.

IN_HAND 2. If the destination is a magazine, make sure that the
• Magazine (not sitting
Library cartridge in hand magazine is correctly seated.
correctly)
3. If the destination is a tape drive, check the tape drive
• Firmware bezel, and replace if it has fallen off.
4. Check tape cartridge.
• If properly in picker, close door and reboot.
• If not properly in picker, remove cartridge.
5. Reboot.
3703=LIBRARY_THREAD_FAILED Firmware See event ID 3705 for isolation procedure.

Library thread failed
3704=LIBRARY_THREAD_WAIT_ Firmware See event ID 3705 for isolation procedure.

FAILED
Library thread wait failed
3705=LIBRARY_THREAD_ Firmware 1. Collect traces and support ticket.

CREATION_FAILED 2. On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library
Library thread creation command to reboot the library.
failed
3706=LIBRARY_UNABLE_TO_ Robot 1. Open library door.

PARK_ROBOT 2. Look for obstruction. For example, the cartridge may be
Library unable to park out too far or the cartridge may be loose in the picker
robot (remove it).
3707=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Firmware 1. Collect traces and support ticket.

MESSAGE_TO_DIRECTOR_FAILED 2. Reboot the library.
Library initialization failed
to send message to Director
3708=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Robot 1. Open library door.

DIRECTOR_RESPONSE 2. Look for obstruction. For example, the cartridge may be
Library initialization failed, out too far or the cartridge may be loose in the picker
Director response (remove it).
unsuccessful 3. Reboot the library.

Table 34 Miscellaneous events (continued)
3709=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Firmware 1. Collect traces and support ticket.

MODIFYING_ELEMENT_MAP 2. Reboot the library.
Library initialization failed
modifying element map
3710=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Firmware 1. Make sure that the interface is configured correctly.

INIT_OF_CELLDB_FAILED 2. Collect traces and support ticket.
Library initialization failed, 3. Reboot the library.
CELLDB init failed
3711=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ • Interface card 1. Make sure that the interface is configured correctly.
MESSAGE_TO_HOST_PROCESS 2. Make sure that the interface card is seated.
• Firmware
Library initialization failed, 3. Collect traces and support ticket.
message to host process 4. Reboot the library.
failed
3712=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ • Robot 1. Open library door.

AUDIT_FAILED 2. Make sure that every load port that is configured as
• Missing magazine
Library initialization failed, storage has a magazine.
audit failed 3. Visually check for obstructions. For example, the cartridge
may be out too far or there may be foreign object on the
floor.
4. Check error logs for an indication of a missing magazine.
5. Watch inventory. If the camera light is continuously on,
continuously off, or blinks erratically, replace the robot
assembly.
6. Collect logs and support ticket.
3713=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ • Power supply 1. Open library door.

CONFIGURATION_VERIFICATION_ 2. See that there are no blockages.
FAILED • Cables
3. Make sure that all power supplies are active (all modules
Library initialization failed, should have power).
configuration failed 4. Make sure that all cables are correctly connected.
3714=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ • Load port magazine 1. Open load port doors.

OPEN_LOADPORTS 2. Insert load port magazine.
• Firmware
Library initialization failed, 3. Reboot the library.
open LOAD PORTS
3715=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ • Interface controller 1. Make sure that all interface controllers are plugged in and
HARPOON_COUNT powered up.
• Firmware
Library initialization failed, 2. Make sure that you have the correct number of interface
incorrect Harpoon card controllers. There should be one for every four tape drives.
count
3716=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ None 1. Make sure that an empty slot in a load port magazine is
HAND_STILL_FULL available. If none is available, create one, and reboot the
Library initialization failed, library.
hand still full 2. Check the robot, get cartridge out of picker if possible,
and reboot the library.
3717=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

ROBOT_INIT_FAILED 2. If the error persists, replace the robotics unit.
Robot initialization failed
Event reporting 91
Table 34 Miscellaneous events (continued)
3718=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Robotics unit 1. Verify that the result code was output as an ERROR, is so
LAST_ROW_POSITION_ACCESS proceed.
Robot initialization failed 2. Check the library for obstructions; remove any obstructions.
3. Verify that the tray is level.
4. Verify that the library is level.
5. Verify that the tray reaches the bottom of the library (does
not catch on the way down).
6. If all of the above conditions are good, replace the
robotics unit.
3719=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Power supply 1. Verify that all modules have power.

PROCFS_REBUILD_FAILED Library robotics controller 2. If any modules are not powered on, then either add a
Rebuild of system module power supply or replace the failed power supply.
portion of the Proc File Firmware
System failed
4. If the condition persists, then collect logs and contact
support.
3720=LIBRARY_INIT_FAILED_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

SENSORMGR_COMM_FAILED 2. If the problem persists, then collect logs and contact
Unable to communicate support.
with Sensor Manager
3721=LIBRARY_FILE_SYSTEM_ Library robotics controller 1. Replace the library robotics controller.

MOUNT_FAILED 2. Reboot the library.
All saved data and 3. If the problem persists, replace the backplane in the 8U
passwords may be lost base module.
4. Replace the library robotics controller with the original
board.
6. If the problem persists, replace the library robotics
controller (both boards are now replaced).
8. If the problem persists, then collect logs and contact
support.
SNMP events
Table 35 SNMP events
3800=VSNMP_SOCKET_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

COMMAND_FAILURE 2. If the condition persists, collect logs and contact support.
VSnmp Socket
Command Failure
3801=VSNMP_BIND_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

VSnmp Bind Command
Failure
3802=VXNMP_LISTEN_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

VSnmp Listen Command
Failure
3803=VSNMP_CONNECT_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

VSnmp Connect
Command Failure

Table 35 SNMP events (continued)
3804=VSNMP_SENT_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

VSnmp SEND Command
Failure
3805=VSNMP_RECV_ Firmware 1. Reboot the library.

VSnmp RECV Command
Failure
Service events
Table 36 Service events
3900=SERVICE_INVALID_ None 1. Invoke help for the needed command.

OP_CODE 2. Verify the syntax.
Service Invalid Op Code 3. Retry the command.
3901=SERVICE_MISSING_ None Retry the command with the missing parameter included.
PARAMETER
Service Missing
Parameter
3902=SERVICE_BAD_ None Retry the command with the correct parameter.

PARAMETER
Service Bad Parameter
3903=SERVICE_COM Firmware 1. Log off.

MUNICATION_FAILURE 2. Log on.
Service Communication 3. Retry the command.
Failure
4. If the condition persists, collect logs and contact support.
3905=SERVICE_INVALID_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

COMMAND_IN_ 2. If the condition persists, collect logs and contact support.
RESPONSE
Service Invalid
Command In Response
3906=SERVICE_RESPONSE_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

TIMEOUT 2. If the condition persists, collect logs and contact support.
Service Response From
Server Timeout
3907=SERVICE_SOCKET_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

ERROR 2. If the condition persists:
Service DCI Socket a. Logoff.
Broken
b. Logon.
c. Retry the command.
3910=SERVICE_RECEIVE_CLI_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

SOCKET_FAILURE 2. If the condition persists:
Service Receive From CLI a. Logoff.
Socket Failure
b. Logon.
3911=SERVICE_SEND_CLI_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

SOCKET_FAILURE 2. If the condition persists:
Event reporting 93
Table 36 Service events (continued)
Service Send To CLI a. Logoff.

Socket Failure b. Logon.
3912=SERVICE_CLI_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

SOCKET_UNAVAILABLE 2. If the condition persists:
Service CLI Socket a. Logoff.
Unavailable
b. Logon.
3913=SERVICE_CLI_SNMP_ Firmware 1. Retry the command.

RESULT_FAILURE 2. If the condition persists:
Service CLI Result Failure a. Logoff.
b. Logon.
Miscellaneous events
Table 37 Miscellaneous events
4002 A parameter was None Check command.

missing from the command
received
4003 A bad parameter None Check command.

was received
4004 The trap recipient None Check command.

requested to be added
already exists
4005 The user requested None Check command.

to be added already exists
4006 The trap recipient None Check command.

requested to be deleted
does not exist
4007 The user requested None Check command.

to be deleted does not exist
4008 There is no trap None Check command.

recipient

Robot events
Table 38 Servo mechanism events
5000=SRV_MECH_STALLED None This event ID is not used.

Mechanism stalled
unexpectedly
5001=SRV_MECH_STALLED_ None 1. Reboot the library.

ON_INIT 2. Retry the operation.
Mechanism stalled 3. If the error persists, check for code update.
unexpectedly - during
initialization
5002=SRV_MECH_OUTSIDE_ None This event ID is not used.

STOPLOCK
Mechanism travelled
outside of its stoplock
range
5003=SRV_ISR_LOGICAL_ None This event ID is not used.

FAILURE
The servo is shut down due
to a logical/software fault
5004=ERR_SRV_ None 1. Reboot the library.

UNKNOWN_REQUEST_TYPE 2. Retry the operation.
An unknown type of 3. If the error persists, check for code update.
request was received by
Servo
5005=ERR_SRV_ None This event ID is not used.

UNEXPECTED_SYS_ERROR_
RET
Kernel/OS fault - An
unexpected system return
code was received by
Servo
5006=ERR_SRV_BAD_CHK_ None This event ID is not used.

MOVE_CALC
An error was encountered
in performing a quick
initialization move
5007=ERR_SRV_DEST_OUTSIDE Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

_OPER_RANGE 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
The requested destination 3. Reboot the library. If errors persist, replace the robot.
is not within the allowable
operating range
5008=ERR_SRV_ILLEGAL_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

PROFILE_TYPE
An undefined profile type
was requested
5009=ERR_SRV_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

OVERCURRENT 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
An overcurrent fault was
detected by the hardware
Event reporting 95
Table 38 Servo mechanism events (continued)
5010=ERR_SRV_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

EXCESSIVE_POSITION_ERROR 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
An excessive position error 3. Reboot the library. If errors persist, replace the robot.
was detected during motion
5011=ERR_SRV_TACH_PHASE_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

ERROR 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
A tachometer phase error
was detected
5012=ERR_SRV_CANT_START_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

NOT_IN_STOPLOCK 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
The requested motion
cannot start because the
mechanism is not in
stoplock
5013=ERR_SRV_ISR_REENTERED None 1. Reboot the library.

The servo interrupt service 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
routine was re-entered
before exiting

SATURATION_CURRENT_ 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
REQUESTED_TOO_LONG 3. Reboot the library.
The max or min current was 4. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Robotics
requested an excessive Status command.
amount of times
• If basic health is good, retry the operation.
• If error persists, replace the robot.
5015=ERR_SRV_MECH_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

DROPPED_OUT_OF_STOPLOCK 2. Retry operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
The mechanism has fallen
outside the allowable
stoplock range
5016=ERR_SRV_MECH_FAILED_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

TO_SETTLE_INTO_STOPLOCK 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
The mechanism was unable 3. Reboot the library.
to settle into the d stoplock 4. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Robotics
window Status command.

OPERATING_RANGE_ 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
OUT_OF_SPEC 3. Reboot the library. If errors persist, replace the robot.
The range of motion on
initialization is not within
specification
5018=ERR_SRV_INVALID_ None This event ID is not used.

THETA_Z_RANGE_
COMBO
The range of motion on
arm init does not match a
valid combination


REDEFINED_LIB_CONFIG 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
The operating ranges found 3. Make sure lift mechanism flex cable is the proper length.
at arm initialization don't 4. Reboot the library. If error persists, replace the robot.
indicate known hardware
5020=ERR_SRV_BAD_MECH_ None 1. Reboot the library.

ID_IN_ISR 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
The servo interrupt received
a bad mechanism identifier
5021=ERR_SRV_ILLEGAL_REQUEST_ None 1. Reboot the library.

OPTION 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
An illegal request option
for servo was requested
5022=ERR_SRV_FAILED_TO_ None This event ID is not used.

ENCOUNTER_CARTRIDGE
The hand failed to
encounter a cartridge

DISENGAGE_CARTRIDGE
The hand failed to
dis-engage a cartridge

SEAT_CARTRIDGE
The cartridge seat sensor
didn't report true after a
fetch

UNSEAT_CARTRIDGE
The cartridge seat sensor
didn't report false after a
put
5026=ERR_SRV_REQUEST_ None 1. Reboot the library.

ALREADY_ACTIVE_AGAINST_ 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
MECHANISM
Motion is already active
against mechanism
5027=ERR_SRV_CANT_MOVE_ None 1. Reboot the library.

ARM_HAND_IS_ACTIVE 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
Arm Request rejected -
hand is currently active
5028=ERR_SRV_CANT_MOVE_ None 1. Reboot the library.

HAND__ARM_IS_ACTIVE 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
Hand Request rejected -
arm is currently active
5029=ERR_SRV_UNEXPECTED_ None 1. Reboot the library.

RESP_AT_DISPATCHER 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
The servo dispatcher
received an invalid
response
Event reporting 97
5030=ERR_SRV_CANT_GET_ None 1. If the picker has a cartridge in it:

WITH_HAND_FULL a. There might have been a prior error. Remove cartridge
Fetch request rejected - from picker, and replace in slot.
hand is already full b. Reboot the library.
c. Retry the operation.
d. If error persists, replace the robot.
2. If the picker is empty:
a. Reboot the library.
b. Retry the operation.
c. If the error persists, replace the robot.
5031=ERR_SRV_CANT_PUT_ Robotics unit This event might be indicative of picker sensor problems.
WITH_HAND_EMPTY 1. If the picker has a cartridge in it:
Put request rejected - hand a. There might have been a prior error. Remove cartridge
is empty from picker, and replace in slot.
b. Reboot the library.
c. Retry the operation.
d. If error persists, replace the robot.
2. If the picker is empty:
a. Reboot the library.
b. Retry the operation.
c. If the error persists, replace the robot.
5032=ERR_SRV_MOVE_ABORTED None Not a failure. An abort was requested and the robot should
The request ended in still be operational.
failure due to an abort
request
5033=ERR_SRV_HAND_NOT_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

SAFE_HAND_IS_INOPERATIVE 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
Hand is not safe - the hand 3. Check for cartridge in picker, and remove if present.
is not operative 4. Reboot the library.
5. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Robotics
Status command.
5034=ERR_SRV_HAND_NOT_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

SAFE_REACH_NOT_RETRACTED 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
Hand is not safe - reach is 3. Check for cartridge in picker, and remove if present.
not retracted 4. Reboot the library.
Status command.
5035=ERR_SRV_HAND_NOT_ None 1. Reboot the library.

SAFE__CARTRIDGE_IS_UNSEATED_ 2. Retry operation. If error persists, check for code update.
IN_GRIP
Hand is not safe - a
cartridge is unseated in the
grip
5036=ERR_SRV_MECHANISM_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

NOT_ INITIALIZED 2. If error persists, replace the robot.

Mechanism must be
initialized prior to
accepting a motion
command
5037=ERR_SRV_MECHANISM_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

SHUTDOWN 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
Mechanism has been shut
down and requires
re-initialization
5038=ERR_SRV_MECHANISM_ None No action required. The event ID may appear prior to a

NOT_OPERATIONAL recovery code being invoked.
The mechanism is not
operational
5039=ERR_SRV_USER_REQ_ None This event ID is not used.

THETA_MOVE_FOR_SCAN
A Z scan was requested
with a theta motion too
large
5040=ERR_SRV_CANT_CLEAR_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

AMP_ENABLE 2. Retry the operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
Could not clear a bit in the
amp enable register during
fault processing
5041=ERR_SRV_SATURATION_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

CURRENT_READ_TOO_LONG 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
The max or min current was 3. Reboot the library. If error persists, replace the robot.
read an excessive amount
of times by the ADC
5042=ERR_SRV_MINIMUM_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

INIT_MOVE_NOT_DETECTED 2. Retry the operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
No motion detected by
tachometer during
mechanism initialization
5043=ERR_SRV_REACH_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

SAFE_SENSOR_FAIL 2. Retry the operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
Reach safe sensor did not
report an encountered level
5044=ERR_SRV_REACH_ None This event ID is not used.

GRIP_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected on
gripper
5045=ERR_SRV_AMP_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

ENABLE_FAIL 2. Retry the operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
The mechanism amplifier
could not be enabled
5046=ERR_SRV_FAILED_ Robotics unit 1. Open library door.

STALL 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
Event reporting 99
The mechanism stall point 3. Check for cartridge in picker, and remove if present.
was outside of allowable 4. Reboot the library.
tolerances
Status command.
5047=ERR_SRV_FAILED_ None This event ID is not used.

STALL__OBSTRUCTED
The hand stall point was
too close to the hand to
assure good operating
range
5048=ERR_SRV_DEST_ Robotics unit Non-fatal event (warning). If the event propagates, it becomes
OUTSIDE_OPER_RANGE_ADJUSTED fatal.
The requested destination 1. Reboot the library.
is not within the allowable 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
operating range
5049=ERR_SRV_NOT_ None This event ID is not used.

RESPONSE_DISCARDED
A srv_response msg was
expected, but another type
of msg was recvd &
discarded
5050=ERR_SRV_CANT_FIND_ None This event ID is not used.

REACH_DEPTH
Reach and touch rejected -
hand is full
5051=ERR_SRV_POWER_ • Door sensor 1. Make sure that the library door is closed.
LOW_ERROR 2. Reboot the library.
• Cabling
A low voltage condition 3. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check door sensors
has been detected on the and cabling for damage. Replace as needed.
servo motor power
5052=ERR_SRV_REQUEST_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
QUEUED_TIMEOUT condition. If it does:
The servo module timed out 1. Reboot the library.
waiting for a request to be 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
queued update.
5053=ERR_SRV_REQUEST_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
ACTIVE_TIMEOUT condition. If it does:
The servo module timed out 1. Reboot the library.
waiting for a request to 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
complete update.
5054=ERR_SRV_BAD_MECH_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
ID_IN_COORD condition. If it does:
The servo coordinator 1. Reboot the library.
received a bad mechanism 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
identifier update.

5055=ERR_SRV_SYS_MSG_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
ALLOC_FAIL condition. If it does:
Servo could not allocate a 1. Reboot the library.
sys message 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
SEND_FAIL condition. If it does:
Servo could not send a sys 1. Reboot the library.
message 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
RECV_FAIL condition. If it does:
Servo could not receive a 1. Reboot the library.
sys message 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
BAD_SIZE condition. If it does:
Servo failed to validate the 1. Reboot the library.
size of a received sys 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
message update.
5059=ERR_SRV_SYS_MSG_ None This event ID is not used.

GET_CONTENT_FAIL
Servo could not get the
content of a received sys
message
SET_CONTENT_FAIL condition. If it does:
Servo could not set the 1. Reboot the library.
content of an allocated sys 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
message update.
RELEASE_FAIL condition. If it does:
Servo could not release an 1. Reboot the library.
allocated sys message 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
5062=ERR_SRV_HAND_NOT_ None 1. Open library door.

SAFE 2. Visually check for obstructions, and clear any found.
Hand is not safe 3. Check for cartridge in picker, and remove if present.
Status command.
5063=ERR_SRV_HAND_INIT_ None This event ID is not used.

FAIL_NOT_EMPTY
Could not sweep
reach/grip - hand not
empty
Event reporting 101

5064=ERR_SRV_COORD_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
SEND_MECH_REQUEST_ condition. If it does:
FAILED 1. Reboot the library.
The servo coordinator 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
received a bad mechanism update.
identifier
5065=ERR_SRV_HALL_ Robotics unit This event will start as intermittent and then occur more
ERROR frequently.
A motor hall error was 1. Reboot the library.
detected 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
5066=ERR_SRV_HDW_OVER_ Robotics unit 1. Reboot the library.

CURRENT_ERROR 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, replace the robot.
A hardware overcurrent
error was detected
5067=ERR_SRV_HDW_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
UNKNOWN_ERROR condition. If it does:
Hardware driver returned 1. Reboot the library.
an unknown error 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
5068=ERR_SRV_EXCESSIVE_ Robotics unit Non-fatal event (warning). If the event propagates, it becomes
MOTOR_HEATING fatal.
The current in the motor is 1. Reboot the library.
causing excessive heating 2. If error persists, replace the robot.
5069=ERR_SRV_SAT_CURRENT_ None 1. Check for improperly installed cartridges, arrays, and

REQ_TOO_LONG_STALL_MIN_ tape drives. Fix as necessary
NOT_REACHED 2. Reboot the library.
The max or min current was 3. Retry the operation. If the event persists, replace the robot.
requested an excessive
amount of times during a
stall move with a minimum
position not reached
5070=ERR_SRV_EXCESSIVE_ None This event ID is not used.

TRACK_STRACK_RELATIVE_ERROR
Exceeded maximum
allowed position error
between the track motors.
Possible gear slip occurred.
5071=ERR_SRV 1. Close the door.

A door open condition has 2. Check the door sensor switch.
been detected. Amps are
shutdown.
5072=ERR_SRV_COORD_ None This event ID is not used.

SEQUENCING_FAILED
The servo coordinator
could not perform
necessary move
sequencing

Scan events
Table 39 Scan events
5400=SCAN_FAULT_OPEN_ Firmware Update firmware.

FAILURE
Failure opening scanner
channel
5401=SCAN_FAULT_POWER_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

UP_FAILURE 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Failed to power up scanner
5402=SCAN_FAULT_ None This event ID is only used in unit test.

INITIALIZATION_FAILURE
Failed to init scanner, could
not get version string
5403=SCAN_APP_RECEIVED_ None Not an error. Used to communicate that the scanner could
NO_MESSAGES not find a target/label when instructed to read one.
Scanner application
received no messages from
driver
5404=SCAN_APP_TO_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

DRIVER_READ_TIMEOUT 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner application timed
out while trying to read
from driver
5405=SCAN_APP_TO_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

DRIVER_WRITE_TIMEOUT 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner application timed
out while trying to write to
driver
5406=SCAN_APP_RECEIVED_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

LLF_NAK_FN 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner returned NAK on
the outgoing packet's frame
number

LLF_NAK_CHKSUM 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner returned NAK on
the outgoing packet's
checksum

LLF_BUSY 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner returned message
indicating packets received
are being ignored

PACKET_WITH_BAD_CHKSUM 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner application
received a packet with a
bad checksum
Event reporting 103

Table 39 Scan events (continued)
5410=SCAN_APP_RECEIVED_ None Not an error. Event ID is returned when the scanner does not
NR see a label when asked to read one.
Scanner application
received a packet with
NR<CR> when expecting
a label
5411=SCAN_APP_BAD_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

STATUS 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner application failed
to return valid status
5412=SCAN_APP_PACKET_ Robot 1. Reboot the library.

SIZE_TOO_LARGE 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Scanner application
attempted to return too
large of packet
5413=SCAN_APP_ASCII_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

TO_INT_PARSE_FAILURE
Scanner application tried
failed while trying to parse
target data
5414=SCAN_APP_LOOKING_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

FOR_TARGET_GOT_BARCODE
Scanner returned a
barcode but the application
was looking for a target

LINE_STATUS_ERROR_INDICATION 2. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Line status
(Overrrun,Framing,Break,or
RxFIFO) error on scanner
serial channel
5416=SCAN_APP_TARGETING_ Robot 1. Inspect library for obstructions, and remove if found.

DATA_TOO_SHORT 2. Reboot the library. If the error persists, replace the robot.
Targeting packet received
from scanner too short to
contain valid data
Target events
Table 40 Target events
5500=TARGET_EXCEEDED_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

MAX_ALLOWABLE_BARS
The camera reported more
bars than are allowed in
the array
5501=TARGET_NOT_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

RECOGNIZED

Table 40 Target events (continued)
No valid target found in

the target scan data from
the camera
5502=TARGET_OFFSET_ Robot 1. Make sure that target hardware is properly installed.

INVALID 2. Reboot the library.
Target offset checking 3. If the error persists, replace the robot.
found an invalid value
5504=TARGET_FAILED_TO_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

CALIBRATE_SCANNER
The calibration of the
camera for targeting failed
(possible no target present
as well)
5700=BURNIN_FAULT_BAD_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

REQU
The burnin module received
a bad IPC message
Coordinated motion (CMO) events

Table 41 CMO events
5600=CMO_FAILED_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
CARTESIAN_LOOKUP_ condition. If it does:
AUDIT 1. Reboot the library.
Failure getting cartesian 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
coordinate data for audit update.
FETCH 1. Reboot the library.
coordinate data for fetch update.
CARTESIAN_LOOKUP_PUT condition. If it does:
Failure getting cartesian 1. Reboot the library.
coordinate data for put 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
update.
TARGET 1. Reboot the library.
coordinate data for update.
targeting
NOMINAL 1. Reboot the library.
coordinate data for update.
nominal move
Event reporting 105

Table 41 CMO events (continued)
5605=CMO_COULD_NOT_ None Internal software error, which should not cause an INOP
STORE_TARGET_CALIBRATION condition. If it does:
Failure storing target 1. Reboot the library.
calibration data in the 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
database update.
5606=CMO_REACH_NOT_ • Robot 1. Check for blockages, and clear if found.

SAFE_DETECTED 2. Make sure that cartridge is properly in picker. If not,
• Sensors
Reach safe sensor reports attempt to return cartridge to original slot location.
not safe 3. Perform reboot, or open and close library door.
4. Retry operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
5607=CMO_HAND_EMPTY_ • Robot 1. Check for obstructions, and clear if found.

DETECTED 2. Make sure that the cartridge is properly in picker. If not,
• Sensors
Cartridge present sensor attempt to return cartridge to original cell location.
reports no cartridge 3. Perform reboot, or open and close library door.
5608=CMO_HAND_FULL_ • Robot 1. Check for obstructions, and clear if found.

DETECTED 2. Make sure that the cartridge is properly in picker. If not,
• Sensors
Cartridge present sensor attempt to return cartridge to original slot location.
reports a cartridge 3. Perform reboot, or open and close library door.
5609=CMO_FAILED_TARGET_ Robot 1. Check for properly installed robot.

CALIBRATION 2. Perform reboot, or open and close library door.
The camera failed to find a 3. Retry operation. If error persists, replace the robot.
target
5610=CMO_FETCH_RETRY_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

PERFORMED unless it occurs a large number of times.
A retry was needed to 2. If event code occurs in large numbers, replace robot after
perform a fetch checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
for defects.
5611=CMO_PUT_RETRY_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

perform a put checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
for defects.
5612=CMO_CART_LABEL_ Cartridge Make sure that the cartridge is labeled correctly.

MISCOMPARE 1. If cartridge is not labeled correctly, correct the label.
The cartridge label or 2. If cartridge is labeled correctly, examine host information.
media type did not match
the one from the controller
5613=CMO_CELL_FULL_ None Event does not occur on library.

DETECTED
Proximity sensor reports a
full cell
5614=CMO_CELL_EMPTY_ None Event does not occur on library.

DETECTED
Proximity sensor reports an
empty cell
5615=CMO_END_OF_RAIL_ None Event does not occur on library.

ID_FAILURE

Failed to read the End of

Rail ID
5616=CMO_INIT_FAILURE Robotics unit 1. Check library for obstructions, and clear if necessary.
Failed initialization 2. Make sure robot flex cable is proper length (not too short
or long).
3. Reboot the library, or open and close the library door.
4. If problem persists, replace the robot.
5617=CMO_FAILED_ None Event does not occur on library.

CARTESIAN_LOOKUP_PROX
Failure getting cartesian
coordinate data for audit
5618=CMO_FAILED_PROX_ None Event does not occur on library.

READ
Received a failure status
when attempting to read
prox sensor
5619=CMO_MOVE_RETRY_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

complete the move-arm checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
request for defects and proper installation.
5620=CMO_INCONSISTENT_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

SUCCESS_ON_FETCH unless it occurs a large number of times.
At the end of a fetch, 2. If event code occurs in large numbers, replace robot after
success was false even checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
though the hand had a for defects and proper installation.
cartridge
5621=CMO_INCONSISTENT_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

SUCCESS_ON_PUT unless it occurs a large number of times.
At the end of a put, success 2. If event code occurs in large numbers, replace robot after
was false even though the checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
hand was empty for defects and proper installation.
5622=CMO_CELL_SCAN_USED_ None 1. Reboot the library.

FOR_AUDIT 2. Retry the operation. If the error persists, check for code
The normal audit failed to update.
find a label so cell scan
was used as a retry
5623=CMO_DEPRECATED_ None Event ID is no longer used.

POSITION_USED_TO_TARGET
Calibration had to use a
deprecated position to find
a target
5624=CMO_USED_INITIAL_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

TARGETED_ LOCATION unless it occurs a large number of times.
Calibration had to use the 2. If event code occurs in large numbers, replace robot after
initial targeted location checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
because the retarget at cal for defects and proper installation.
position failed
Event reporting 107

5625=CMO_AUDIT_LABEL_ • Labels If event ID occurs frequently, check for damaged labels.

MIN_LENGTH_NOT_MET 1. If damaged labels found, replace them.
• Robot
Audit read a label but the 2. If labels are not damaged, replace the robot.
minimum label length of six
characters was not met
5626=CMO_FAILED_UNSET_ None Internal software error that does not propagate.

TARGET_CALIBRATION
Failed to unset target
calibration
5627=CMO_RECOVER_FOR_ None Event ID no longer used.

FETCH_PUTBACK_NOT_
ATTEMPTED
Conditions of current
location and/or a
non-operational robot
prevented a putback
5628=CMO_RECOVER_FOR_ None Event ID no longer used.

FETCH_SRV_RECOVERED_
CART
SRV recover hand for fetch
succeeded in recovering
cartridge
5629=CMO_FAILED_HANDBOT_ None Event ID no longer used.

RANGE_GET
Failed to get a mech's
range (range not set, mech
not initialized)
5630=CMO_CALIBRATION_ Robot 1. Occurs occasionally as part of operation. Do nothing

RETRY_ PERFORMED unless it occurs a large number of times.
perform a calibration checking hardware (tape drives, arrays, and load ports)
for defects and proper installation.
5631 The sweep range of Robot 1. Check library for obstructions to the robot tray drop.
Z is too short to reach all 2. Check floor of library for foreign materials.
locations 3. Check for pinched black umbilical cable on robot.
4. Make sure the drive bezels are snapped in place correctly.
5. Check for proper length on screws that hold module
faceplates together.
6. Replace robot.
5632 The sweep range of Robot 1. Check and remove any obstructions in the robot tray.
TRACK is too short to reach 2. Replace robot.
all locations
5633 The sweep range of Robot 1. Check and remove any obstructions in the robot tray.
WRIST is too short to reach 2. Replace robot.
all locations

Tape drive events
Table 42 Tape drive events
6000 None Wait for command to complete.

Command in progress for
this drive
6001 • Cartridge Load cartridge into tape drive.

Load operation failed - no • Tape drive assembly
cartridge present
6002 • Cartridge 1. Attempt command again.

Rewind operation failed 2. Open door and manually attempt rewind/unload by
• Tape drive assembly
pressing the Eject button on the tape drive. If tape unloads,
place tape into empty storage slot and close the door.
3. After inventory completes, use OCP to attempt to move
cartridge to same tape drive. If move fails, attempt moving
other cartridges to the same tape drive.
a. If these moves fail, replace the tape drive.
b. If these moves are successful, replace the cartridge.
4. If tape does not manually rewind or unload, replace tape
drive.
6003 • Cartridge 1. Attempt command again.

Unload operation failed 2. Open door and manually attempt rewind/unload by
pressing the Eject button on the tape drive. If tape unloads,
place tape into empty storage slot and close the door.
3. After inventory completes, use OCP to attempt to move
cartridge to same tape drive. If move fails, attempt moving
other cartridges to the same tape drive.
a. If these moves fail, replace the tape drive.
b. If these moves are successful, replace the cartridge.
4. If tape does not manually rewind or unload, replace tape
drive.
6004 Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
Set drive configuration Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
command. If the tape drive shows an error state, reboot
the library.
3. If the problem persists, replace the tape drive.
Operation failed at the TTI Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
interface 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
Drive initialization failed Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
Event reporting 109

Table 42 Tape drive events (continued)
Drive is present, but of Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
unknown type 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
Service drive could not Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
complete 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→ Drives
the library.
TTI Response Timeout Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
Command not supported Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
by the drive 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
6011 None Wait for task to finish. If the task does not complete, retry it
Initialization in progress, again.
no commands accepted
6012 None On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library command

Failure in a sys function to reboot the library.
6013 None On the OCP, enter the Operations→Reboot Library command

sys timeout to reboot the library.
There was an unknown Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
failure 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
A bad parameter(s) was Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
passed to the function 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The cartridge in the drive Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
is not ready for a fetch 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.

6017 Tape drive assembly 1. Visually inspect tape drive, picker, and storage slot to
The fetch succeeded, but determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
the cartridge is still in the source and retry the command.
drive 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
the library.
The drive cannot accept a determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
cartridge because one is source and retry the command.
present 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
the library.
The put succeeded, but the determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
drive is empty source and retry the command.
the library.
The responding drive id is determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
not the same as the source and retry the command.
command drive id 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
the library.
The drive requested is not determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
installed source and retry the command.
the library.
The put failed, but the determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
cartridge is in the drive source and retry the command.
the library.
Event reporting 111

The fetch failed, but the determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
drive is empty source and retry the command.
the library.
Requesttofetch: determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
cartridgePresent flag true source and retry the command.
while drive sensor shows 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
empty Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
Fetchcomplete: determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape cartridge
cartridgePresent flag true to original source and retry the command.
the library.
Rewindunload: determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
3. On the OCP, enter Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
This drive can't currently determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
accept commands because source and retry the command.
it is powered off 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
the library.
The drive cannot accept a determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
cartridge because the drive source and retry the command.
is loaded 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
the library.

Requesttoput: determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
the library.
6030 Tape drive assembly 1. Retry command. If problem persists, go to next step.
The drive is not in a state 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
to handle a cartridge Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
The put failed because the determine location of tape cartridge. Move tape to original
drive is loaded source and retry the command.
3. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→ Drives
the library.
The drive is not in a state Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
to handle a cartridge 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The fetch complete from the Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
drive failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray received a Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
bad IPC message 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray power up Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
request failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
Event reporting 113

The drive tray power down Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
request failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray get status Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
request failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→ Drives
the library.
The drive tray is not seated Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
correctly 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray fan failed Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
The drive tray temperature Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
The drive tray power Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
supply failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray 48 volt Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
power supply failed 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
The drive tray fault led is Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
on 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.

The drive tray file open Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
the library.
6400=TTI_RESULT_DRIVE_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
CONDITION
Drive condition
6401=TTI_RESULT_DRIVE_ Tape drive assembly (only See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
BUSY if tape drive is continuously
Drive busy busy)
6402=TTI_RESULT_ None Generate tape drive support ticket.

COMMAND_NOT_SUPPORTED
Drive command not
supported
6403=TTI_RESULT_FAIL_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
STATUS_COMMAND
Drive failed status
command
6404=TTI_RESULT_UPPER_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
RETRY_EXCEEDED
Upper retry limit exceeded
6405=TTI_RESULT_RETRY_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
EXCEEDED
Retries exceeded
6406=TTI_RESULT_READ_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
TIMEOUT
A TTI read timeout occurred
6407=TTI_RESULT_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6408 for isolation procedure.
COMM_ERROR
Communication error
occurred with the drive
6408=TTI_RESULT_NO_DRIVE_ Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
ERROR Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
No drive 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
the library.
3. Issue a move command to load the tape drive. If the
command fails, replace the tape drive.
6409=TTI_RESULT_ Software 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot

WRONG_PORT_NUM Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
Port number received in the 2. Issue a command to get the tape drive state. If the
response does not match command fails, collect traces, and replace the tape drive.
the one in the request
Event reporting 115

6410=TTI_RESULT_ • Tape drive firmware Collect traces. If problem persists, reboot the library.
WRONG_PACKET_SIZE
Response packet size
doesn't match the packet • Software
length specified
6411=TTI_RESULT_FAIL_ • Tape drive assembly See event ID 6414 for isolation procedure.
DETERMINE_INSTALLED_
DRIVE • Software
Failed to determine what

type of drive is installed
6412=TTI_RESULT_FAIL_TO_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6414 for isolation procedure.
SET_HOLDOFF_LOAD
Failed to set the drive to
holdoff load mode
6413=TTI_RESULT_FAIL_TO_ Tape drive assembly See event ID 6414 for isolation procedure.
SET_FILE_PROTECT
Failed to set the drive to file
protect mode
6414=TTI_RESULT_UNKNOWN_ • Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
DRIVE Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
• Software
Request failed because the 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
drive is unknown command. If the tape drive shows an error state, reboot
the library.
6415=TTI_RESULT_LOAD_FAIL_ • Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
CART_PRESENT Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
• Picker (robot)
The load failed and the 2. On the OCP, enter the Status→Health Summary→Drives
cartridge is still present command. If the tape drive shows an error state, reboot
the library.
6416=TTI_RESULT_LOAD_FAIL_ • Tape drive assembly If the cartridge is sitting in the throat of the tape drive, replace
NO_CARTRIDGE the tape drive (sensor is not functioning). If the cartridge is
• Picker (robot) not in the tape drive:
The load failed because
there is no cartridge 1. Check the picker for cartridge, and manually extract it, if
present present.
2. Issue a move command from a slot to the tape drive.
3. If the cartridge does not load, check tape drive status on
OCP.
a. If results indicate the cartridge is not present, check the
picker, and if cartridge is in picker, replace the robot.
b. If cartridge loads, the problem is resolved.
6417=TTI_RESULT_DRIVE_ • Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
INTERFACE_TYPE_ Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
UNKNOWN • Tape drive firmware
• Software command. If the tape drive shows an error state, remove

Drive configuration was and reinstall it, and check health again. If tape drive state
tried, but the interface type command fails a second time, replace the tape drive.
is unknown
NOTE: The log_error trace file should have an entry for
incompatible tape drive type.
6418=TTI_RESULT_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Open library door.

DRIVE_UNKNOWN_ 2. Visually check position of cartridge.
CART_POSITION • Picker (robot)
a. If stuck, try removing cartridge.
The drive tried to load the b. If unable to remove cartridge, remove tape drive, and
cart, but failed. Cart try to remove cartridge manually.
position in drive unknown
3. Issue moves to tape drive from OCP. If load fails, replace
the robot assembly or tape drive.
6419=TTI_RESULT_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Check tape drive firmware for correct version.
INVALID_RESPONSE_PACKET 2. Check tape drive type on OCP.
• Tape drive firmware
The response packet was 3. If problem persists, update firmware.
invalid. 4. If tape drive is a new type (might not be supported by
firmware), replace the tape drive.
6426=TTI_RESULT_ • Media 1. Move cartridge to another tape drive.

CARTRIDGE_MEDIA_ERROR a. If problem persists, replace cartridge.
The Drive reported a b. If problem disappears, check tape drive state in OCP.
Cartridge MEDIA ERROR. 2. Determine if tape drive needs cleaning from the tape drive
This can occur on load or state command.
unload.
a. If cleaning is required, clean the tape drive.
b. If cleaning is not required, go to step 3.
3. Move a different cartridge to the original tape drive. If
error persists, replace the tape drive.

INCORRECT_SEQUENCE_ Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
NUMBER 2. Check the tape drive status on the OCP. If the tape drive
The Response Sequence shows an error state, remove and reinstall it, and check
Number Does Not Match health again. If tape drive state command fails a second
the Request Sequence time, replace the tape drive.
Number
6434=TTI_RESULT_UNIT_ Tape drive assembly 1. Check the command.

CHECK_CONDITION 2. Reissue the command.
The Drive Returned a Unit 3. If condition persists, replace the tape drive.
Check Condition in the
Response
6435=TTI_RESULT_ Software 1. Reissue command.

SURROGATE_SCSI_TASK_ 2. Collect traces and generate a support ticket. Open an
ABORTED escalation case with your regional level 2 storage team
The Drive Received an to engage level 3 engineering.
Abort Message While
Processing a Surrogate
SCSI Command
Event reporting 117

6436=TTI_RESULT_ • Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
UNKNOWN_STATUS Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
• Software
The Drive Returned an 2. Check the tape drive status on the OCP. If the tape drive
Unknown Status in the shows an error state, remove and reinstall it, and check
Response health again. If tape drive state command fails a second
time, replace the tape drive.
6437=TTI_RESULT_DRIVE_ None Clean the tape drive.

NEEDS_CLEANING
The Drive has indicated it
needs to be cleaned
6438=TTI_RESULT_FAIL_TO_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Attempt to move cartridge to another tape drive.
RESET_HOLDOFF_LOAD 2. If problem persists, replace the cartridge.
• Tape cartridge
Failed to reset the drive 3. If problem disappears, move a different cartridge to the
holdoff load mode original tape drive. If problem continues to persist, replace
the tape drive.
6439=TTI_RESULT_DRV_ Tape drive assembly 1. Open library door.

EMPTY_POSSIBLE_OVEREJECT 2. Visually inspect cartridge, and reinsert into tape drive
Drive is empty on manually.
rewindUnload: possible a. If cartridge does not load, replace tape drive.
overeject b. If cartridge loads, unload cartridge manually.
3. If conditions persist, replace the tape drive.
6440=TTI_RESULT_LOAD_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Might be a bad cartridge. Attempt to move cartridge to
TIMEOUT another tape drive.
• Media
The Drive failed to load 2. If cartridge does not load, replace the cartridge.
within the allotted time 3. If cartridge does load, move a different cartridge to the
original tape drive. If problem continues to persist, replace
the tape drive.
6441=TTI_RESULT_ • Tape drive assembly 1. Open the library door.

UNLOAD_TIMEOUT 2. Possibly a stuck cartridge. Visually inspect cartridge. If not
• Media
The Drive failed to unload stuck, issue command to rewind and unload cartridge.
within the allotted time 3. If cartridge remains stuck, remove tape drive and manually
eject cartridge.
4. Replace tape drive.
6442=TTI_RESULT_HP_ • Tape drive assembly 1. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
TIMEOUT Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
• Tape drive firmware
A HP LTO Drive command 2. Check the tape drive status on the OCP. If the tape drive
Timeout occurred • Software shows an error state, remove and reinstall it, and check
health again. If tape drive state command fails a second

PREVENT_MEDIA_REMOVAL Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
The Drive reported prevent 2. Check the tape drive status on the OCP. If the tape drive
media removal set shows an error state, remove and reinstall it, and check
health again. If tape drive state command fails a second
3. Move the cartridge from the OCP. If cartridge fails to
unload, remove cartridge manually.
4. If problem persists, replace the tape drive.

6448=TTI_HP_OFF_BUS • Software 1. Check FC and SCSI cables.

The HP LTO drive has gone • Tape drive assembly 2. On the OCP, enter the Support→Service Menu→Reboot
off the bus Drive command to initialize the tape drive.
3. Check for port enabled. If condition persists:
a. With FC cable, move cable to port B and check if port
enabled. If problem persists, try another switch port,
and check if port enabled.
b. With SCSI cable, try another cable, and check if port
enabled.
4. If problem persists, replace tape drive.
6453=TTI_RESULT_CLEANING_ Cleaning cartridge Replace cleaning cartridge.

CARTRIDGE_EXPIRED
Load failed due to expired
cleaning cartridge
6454 Load failed due to Tape cartridge or tape 1. Check tapecartridge for correct buckler pin position.
mis-buckle error drive 2. Run 10 cycles of load/unload on this tape drive with
another known good media. If this fails replace the tape
drive.
Configuration events
Table 43 Configuration events
7001 CAP Open requested None No action.

from key-pad or op-panel
7002 CAP Opened Faceplate 1. Close any open load port doors.
2. If no load port doors are open, the load port door sensor
might be faulty. Replace the faceplate.
7003 CAP Closed Faceplate 1. Close any open load port doors.
2. If no load port doors are open, the load port door sensor
might be faulty. Replace the faceplate.
7020 Door Open None No action.

requested from key-pad or
op-panel
7021 Robot now parked, None Not an error.

door may be opened
7022 Robot now unparked None No action.

due to timeout
7023 Door Opened Door switch 1. Close the center door.

2. If the center door is not open, the door switch might be
faulty. Replace the door switch.
7024 Door closed Door switch 1. Close the center door.

2. If the center door is not open, the door switch might be
faulty. Replace the door switch.
Event reporting 119

Environmental events
Table 44 Environmental events
8000 Module power None Not an error.

supply installed

supply removed

supply working
8003 Module power Power supply Replace the power supply in the module.
supply failed
8010 Module fan working None Not an error.
8011 Module fan failed Fan Replace the fan in the module.
8012 Drive fan working None Not an error.
8013 Drive fan failed Tape drive module 1. Check the fan in the tape drive module for obstructions.
2. Replace the tape drive module.
8020 Module temperature Fan 1. Check the fan in the module for obstructions.
sensor has exceeded the 2. Replace the fan in the module.
warning level
8021 Module temperature Fan 1. Check the fan in the module for obstructions.
sensor has reached the 2. Replace the fan in the module.
shutdown level
8022 Drive temperature Tape drive module 1. Check the fan in the tape drive module for obstructions.
sensor has exceeded the 2. Replace the tape drive module.
warning level
8023 Drive temperature Tape drive module 1. Check the fan in the tape drive module for obstructions.
sensor has reached the 2. Replace the tape drive module.
shutdown level

4 Removing and replacing parts
This chapter provides information for the removal and replacement of each expansion module and
field replaceable unit (FRU).
IMPORTANT: Effective July 1, 2006, The European Union Restriction of Hazardous Substances
(RoHS) Directive restricts the use of specific substances in newly manufactured electrical and
electronic products. As a result, some parts are now made with different, regulation-compliant
materials. Except where otherwise noted in this guide the parts look and function exactly like the
existing non-regulation-compliant parts. To ensure HP complies with these regulations, it is important
that you use regulation-compliant parts in regulation-compliant libraries.
To determine whether your library is regulation compliant, do one of the following:
• If the library is an EML 71e, it is always regulation compliant.
• If the library is any other EML configuration, you must find its part number to determine whether
it is regulation compliant. To find the part number, open the back doors of the rack. The part
number is on a label on the inside of the top of the back door frame. The part number will be
either AG104A or AG104B. AG104A is non-regulation compliant, whereas AG104B is
regulation compliant.
CAUTION: Components within the library contain static-sensitive parts. Use appropriate ESD
precautions, including the use of a grounding strap, when performing service inside the library.
Tape drive expansion module

Part number AD565A1 or AD565B
Location You can install up to three tape drive expansion modules in a library.
Install the first tape drive expansion module below the base module.
Install the second tape drive expansion module below the card cage
expansion module. Install the third tape drive expansion module
below the second tape drive expansion module.
Characteristics 8U chassis with space for four tape drives and 94 LTO slots (84
permanent and 10 configurable) and a 10-cartridge configurable
load port
Function • Adds capacity

• Allows for additional tape drives
Illustration
Tape drive expansion module 121

1
Because the hardware installation has changed, you can use this part only in libraries with the part number AG104A.
Tape drive expansion module—AD565A

Required tools—AD565A
• T-15 Torx screwdriver
Installing a tape drive expansion module—AD565A
NOTE: If you install tape drive expansion modules and capacity expansion modules in the same
library, HP recommends that you install all of the tape drive expansion modules above all of the
capacity expansion modules.
library.
5. Remove enough blank panels to provide an 8U opening for each module being installed. To
remove a blank panel, turn the slotted clip on each side 90 degrees, and pull the panel off.
6. To allow clearance for the floor to be removed, remove the center door from the module
containing the floor. See (page 179), (page 182), and (page 183).
7. Remove the floor from the existing module:
a. Remove the two floor brackets by reaching inside the front of the library, pressing down
on the floor spring lances, and then sliding the floor brackets toward the center. Set aside
the brackets.
b. Remove the two Torx screws that secure the floor to the front faceplate.
c. Slide the floor out the front of the library.
8. Install the clip nuts on the front and back stiles of the rack at the positions listed in the following
table. At each U level, there is a T (top), C (center), and B (bottom) position (see (page 122)).
Table 45 Clip nut positions for expansion modules1
Front Back
1st tape drive expansion module 27B23T21C 27B22B
2nd tape drive expansion module 15B11T09C 15B10B
3rd tape drive expansion module 07B03T01C 07B02B

1
This table does not apply to the EML 71e which is installed in your own rack and can be in any position in the
rack.
Figure 53 Rail clip nut position pattern

9. Loosely install the 8U L-brackets to each side of the rear of the rack with two T-15 Torx screws
in each L-bracket.
10. Install the 8U expansion module walls:
NOTE: The right-side wall has a load port door interlock cable taped to it.
a. From the front of the library, hold the left-side wall so that the hook tabs are up and slide
the wall onto the lip of the module above it. Align the hook tabs with the slots, and then
push the wall toward the back of the library until the tabs engage, and the front of the
wall is flush with the rack.
b. Loosely install the bottom front screw.
c. Repeat these steps to install the right-side wall.
11. Install the 8U tape drive expansion module. Repeat this step for each tape drive expansion
module that you are installing.
NOTE: Make sure the ribbon cable does not get pinched as you slide the tape drive
expansion module into the back of the library.
a. Slide the tape drive expansion module most of the way into the back of the library between
the 8U expansion module walls.
b. Remove the secondary power supply or blank plate on the module above the tape drive
expansion module. Two T-15 Torx screws secure the power supply or one screw secures
a blank plate.
c. Reach inside the upper compartment and plug in the expansion module interconnect
ribbon cable by pushing the cable onto the connector.
TIP: Remove the top drive bay cover plate on the tape drive expansion module to gain
access to the interconnect ribbon cable.
d. Completely slide the tape drive expansion module into the back of the library. Make sure
the tabs on the side walls align with the slots on the expansion module.
e. Turn the two cam-lock screws one-quarter turn clockwise with a Phillips screwdriver to
lock the module in place.
f. Tighten the two captured slotted thumbscrews.
g. Use two T-25 Torx screws to attach each side wall to the rack L-brackets.
h. Replace the secondary power supply with two T-15 Torx screws or the cover plate with
the one T-15 Torx screw.
i. From the front of the library, plug the load port door interlock cable into the connector
on the back wall of the tape drive expansion module.
12. Reach inside the front of the library, and install the lift pole and lift pole mount with a T-25
Torx screw. The lift pole is in the back left corner of the library and connects to the bottom of
the lift pole mount in the module above it.
13. Install the three-slot and six-slot arrays:
a. Starting at the bottom of the tape drive expansion module, install two rows of the six-slot
arrays. Leave the top right array slot empty for load port magazine access.
b. Above the six-slot arrays, install the top row of the three-slot arrays. Leave the top right
array slot empty for load port magazine access.
14. Install the 8U front faceplate assembly to the tape drive expansion module. See (page 188).

15. Install the floor on the bottom module.
a. Align the floor with the grooves on the side walls under the expansion module and slide
the floor into the frame.
b. Install two T-15 Torx screws into the front of the floor panel.
c. Place the floor brackets on the spring lances, aligning the tabs with the slots, and slide
the brackets away from each other.
16. Replace any center doors previously removed (see (page 180), (page 182), or (page 183)).
17. Install the front center door for the tape drive expansion module. See (page 181).
18. Install the tape drives. See (page 182).
NOTE: Before you can connect the tape drive cables below, you must have a card cage
expansion module installed with an interface controller for the four tape drives of the tape
drive expansion module.
19. Connect the FC and Ethernet cables from the tape drives to the interface controller:
a. Connect the top tape drive FC cable to the TD0 port on the interface controller, the second
tape drive to the TD1 port, the third tape drive to the TD2 port, and the bottom tape drive
to the TD3 port.
b. Connect an Ethernet cable from a TO FIBRE CHANNEL CONTROLLERS port on the
Interface Manager card to the Ethernet slot on the interface controller.
20. Tighten all screws on the side walls and L-brackets of the tape drive expansion module.
21. Plug the power supply cables into the power strip.
22. Power on the library.
Tape drive expansion module—AD565B

Required tools—AD565B
• Flat-blade screwdriver (optional)
Installing a tape drive expansion module—AD565B
NOTE: If you install tape drive expansion modules and capacity expansion modules in the same
library, HP recommends that you install all of the tape drive expansion modules above all of the
capacity expansion modules.
NOTE: If you are installing a module whose part number ends with the letter B in a library with
the part number AG104A, you must install the B module below all A modules.

1. Park the robot.
a. Use your backup software to stop all library activity and make sure the picker is empty.
b. On the OCP, select the Operations→Unlock Door command to park the robot.
c. Turn off the power to the library.
d. Turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise and open the center door of
the library.
e. Retract the lift-flex cable. Pull off the cover of the robotics unit. Pull the retraction handle
on the left side of the robotics unit out of the opening and away from the front of the
library until you feel resistance. Push the retraction handle back into the opening. Replace
the cover of the robotics unit.
Figure 54 Pulling the retraction handle

2. Prepare the rack.
a. Remove enough blank panels to provide an 8U opening for each expansion module
being installed.
b. Install the clip nuts on the front stiles of the rack at the positions listed in the following
table. At each U level, there is a T (top), C (center), and B (bottom) position (see
(page 122)).
Table 46 Clip nut positions for expansion modules1
Front
1st tape drive expansion module 27B23T
2nd tape drive expansion module 15B11T
3rd tape drive expansion module 07B03T

1
This table does not apply to the EML 71e which is installed in your own rack and can be in any position in
the rack.
c. Attach the mounting brackets to the rear stiles of the rack with two T-15 Torx screws in
each bracket. The pegs on the mounting brackets insert into the positions listed in the
following table.
Table 47 Mounting bracket peg positions for expansion modules1
Rear
1st tape drive expansion module 24T23B21C
2nd tape drive expansion module 12T11B09C
3rd tape drive expansion module 04T03B01C

1
This table does not apply to the EML 71e which is installed in your own rack and can be in any position in
the rack.
Figure 55 Position of the mounting brackets

3. Remove the floor from the library.
a. Remove the two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws that secure the floor to the bottom
module in the library. Use a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
b. Slide the floor out of the front of the library.
4. Install the expansion module.
WARNING! The tape drive expansion unit weighs 20.0 kg (44.0 lb). The card cage
expansion module weights 20.0 kg (44.0 lb). The capacity expansion module weights 20.1
kg (44.2 lb). Be careful when lifting.
a. Starting with the right side, insert the rails on the top of the expansion module into the
L-flange of the module above it.
b. Open the center door of the expansion module and align the tongue on the top of the
center door with the groove in the center door above it.
c. Continue sliding the expansion module into the rack until it is two-thirds into the rack.
d. From the rear of the library, guide the notches in the lower corners of the expansion
module onto the mounting brackets.
e. Insert the expansion module fully into the rack.
f. Remove the load port door or 4U blank cover (see (page 178) or (page 219)).
g. Attach the expansion module to the rack with four side T-25 Torx screws.
h. Install the load port door or 4U blank cover (see (page 178) or (page 220).
CAUTION: Use the correct length screw to attach the faceplate. The robot will hit a
longer screw when it descends.
i. Attach the expansion module to the faceplate above it with two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch
Torx screws. Use a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
j. Insert the lift pole onto the pole mount on the lower-left corner of the back wall inside the
library. Push down on the pole until the top of the pole slips into the pole mount in the
module above it.
5. Install the floor.
CAUTION: It is extremely important to install the floor to prevent the robot from moving off
the lift pole and guides.
a. Starting with the left side, align the floor with the L-flange on the bottom of the expansion
module and slide the floor into the library.
b. Check that the floor tabs slide into the slots in the back of the chassis.
c. Install two center 6/32 x 1/4 inch Torx screws to attach the floor to the faceplate. Use
a T-15 Torx screwdriver.

6. Plug in the interconnect cable.
a. Find the part number of the module that is above the expansion module that you are
installing. To find the part number, do one of the following:
• If the module is an expansion module, the part number is on a label on the back of
the expansion module. The part number will be either AD564B, AD565A, AD565B,
AD566A, or AD566B.
• If the module is the base module in an EML 71e, the part number is AH062A.
• If the module is the base module in any other EML configuration, open the back
doors of the rack. The part number is on a label on the inside of the top of the back
door frame. The part number will be either AG104A or AG104B.
b. Plug in the interconnect cable to connect this module to the one above it by Performing
one of the following:
• If the part number of the upper module is AD565A or AD566A. use a T-15 Torx
screwdriver to remove the bottom power supply or cover from the upper module and
the top power supply from the expansion module. Plug the ribbon cable that came
with the expansion module into the top of the backplane on the expansion module.
Plug the other end of the ribbon cable into the bottom of the backplane on the upper
module.
• If the part number of the upper module is AD564B, AD565B, AD566B, or AH062A,
loosen the thumbscrew that attaches the cover over the interconnect-cable compartment
on the upper module and remove the cover. Use the white tag to pull out the flat
ribbon cable from the compartment. Plug the cable into the lower module. Install the
new, larger cover over the interconnect-cable compartment on both modules and
tighten the thumbscrew.
7. Install the components in the expansion module by performing one of the following.
• If you are installing a tape drive expansion module, install and cable the tape drives (see
(page 157) or applicable LTO4 and later posters. Plug the power cords into the power
supplies and into the power strips.
• If you are installing a card cage expansion module, install and cable the interface
controllers (see (page 146) and (page 148)). Plug the power cords into the power supplies
and into the power strips.
8. Insert the tape cartridges into the slots through the center door of the library.
to lock it.
10. Turn on the power to the library.
Card cage expansion module

Part number AD566A1 or AD566B2
Location You can install one card cage expansion module in a library. Install
the card cage expansion module below the first tape drive
expansion module.
Characteristics 4U chassis with space for four interface controllers and 48

permanent LTO slots.

Function • Adds capacity.
• Allows for four additional interface controllers. You need one
interface controller for every four tape drives that you install.
Illustration
1
2
Because the hardware installation has changed, you can use this part only in libraries with the part numbers AG104B
or AH062A.
To install a card cage expansion module—AD566A, see (page 122).

To install a card cage expansion module—AD566B, see (page 124).
Capacity expansion module

Part number AD564B
Location You can install one or two capacity expansion modules in a library.
Install the first capacity expansion module below the card cage
expansion module. Install the second capacity expansion module
below the first capacity expansion module.
Characteristics 8U chassis with 120 LTO slots (110 permanent and 10

configurable) and a 10-cartridge configurable load port
Function Adds capacity
Illustration
To install a capacity expansion module, see (page 124).

Part Number 375814-0011, 435891-001, or 459861–001
Location Top slot in the base-module card cage
Characteristics Contains one Ethernet connection to the Interface Manager card
Function Controls the movement of the library robotics
Illustration
Capacity expansion module 129

1
Use this non-RoHS-compliant part in libraries with the part number AG104A. For more information, see (page 121).
Required tools
• #1 Phillips screwdriver
Library robotics controller, part number 459861–001, ships with library firmware version 1223
or later.
• If necessary, upgrade the Interface Manager and other library components to be compatible
with firmware version 1223 or later.
To check the library fimware version, do one of the following:
• On the Operator Control Panel (OCP), select the Status tab, and then select Identity Screen.
• In Command View TL, click the Identity tab.
• In the Interface Manager card Command Line Interface (CLI), enter the command show
firmware revisions.
You can download the latest firmware version from the HP web site http://www.hp.com/support/
emle or http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl. Read the release notes to determine the full firmware
package or bundle required.
Removing the library robotics controller

3. Identify the library robotics controller in the top slot in the card cage in the base module.
4. Label the cables or write a note that shows the locations of all the cables plugged into the
library robotics controller to make it easier to reconnect them later.
5. Unplug all cables from the library robotics controller.
6. Loosen the captive screws in the ejector handles at both ends of the library robotics controller.
Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Push in the red tabs on the ejector handles and push the ejector handles to the outside.
8. Pull the ejector handles to remove the library robotics controller from the library.
Figure 56 Removing the library robotics controller
Replacing the library robotics controller

1. Position the library robotics controller as shown in (page 130). Align the library robotics controller
with the guides in the top slot in the card cage in the base module and slide the library robotics
controller into the library.
2. Push the ejector handles to the inside to fully engage the library robotics controller into the
backplane.

3. Tighten the captive screws in both ejector handles. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
4. Plug the cables into the library robotics controller exactly as they were plugged into the original
library robotics controller (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
NOTE: The settings for the library robotics controller are stored in the 8U base module
backplane and are transferred to a new library robotics controller when installed. If you have
to replace a library robotics controller and the 8U base module backplane together, open an
escalation case with your regional level 2 storage team to engage level 3 engineering.
6. Wait 10 minutes and then make sure that the library robotics controller ACTIVE indicator is
lit (see (page 46)).

Part Number 342213-0011, 393531-001 or 480240-001
Location Bottom slot in the base-module card cage
Characteristics Contains six Ethernet connections to the library robotics controller,

four interface controllers, and the SAN; two 3-pin serial ports;
status, activity, and error LEDs
Function Manages the interface controllers in order to monitor and manage

the library
Illustration
342213-001 or 393531-001
480240-001
1
Required tools
Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001

This section explains how to replace the 342213-001 or 393531-001 Interface Manager card
installed in an EML E-Series tape library. These versions of the Interface Manager card contain a
label with the part number AS#340252-001 or AS#340252-002 and have an AUX port next to
the serial port.
Removing the Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001

3. Identify the Interface Manager card. It is located in the bottom slot in the card cage in the
base module.
Interface Manager card 131

Interface Manager card to make it easier to reconnect them later.
5. Unplug all cables from the Interface Manager card.
6. Loosen the captive screws in the ejector handles at both ends of the Interface Manager card.
CAUTION: Be aware that the metal tabs on the gasket on the filler panel can be caught and
bent by the pins on the Interface Manager card. If bent, these tabs can cause a short circuit.
Avoid removing or installing the Interface Manager card at an extreme angle and watch that
the metal tabs on the gasket do not get caught or bent.
7. Push the ejector handles to the outside, and then pull the ejector handles to remove the Interface
Manager card from the library.
8. Pull the ejector handles to remove the Interface Manager card from the library.
Figure 57 Removing the Interface Manager card
9. Move the CompactFlash memory card from the original Interface Manager card to the new
Interface Manager card. The CompactFlash memory card stores the firmware and configuration
information for the Interface Manager card.
a. Put the Interface Manager card battery-side up on your work surface.
b. Grasp the edges of the CompactFlash memory card and slide it out of the flash memory
slot. If needed, push a pen into the corner notches of the flash memory slot to disengage
the CompactFlash memory card.
Figure 58 Removing the CompactFlash memory card from the Interface Manager card
1. Interface Manager card 2. Flash memory slot

3. CompactFlash memory card
c. Put the new Interface Manager card battery-side up on your work surface.

d. With the connector going in first, align the sides of the CompactFlash memory card with
the flash memory slot on the new Interface Manager card. Gently slide the CompactFlash
memory card into the slot until it is fully engaged. If the CompactFlash memory card does
not slide in easily, the card is upside down.
10. Compare the memory modules.
a. Locate the memory module on the old and replacement Interface Manager cards. Compare
the memory modules on the two cards.
• If the memory module on the old Interface Manager card has more memory, follow
the instructions in Step 10.b to put the larger memory module on the new Interface
Manager card.
• If the memory modules on the two Interface Manager cards have the same amount
of memory or the new Interface Manager card has more memory, skip Step 10.b
and continue with “Replacing the Interface Manager card 342213-001 or
393531-001” (page 133).
Figure 59 Comparing memory modules
b. Remove the memory module from both Interface Manager cards. To remove the memory
module from the Interface Manager card, pull the latches away from the memory module
on both sides. When both latches are unfastened, the memory module pops up.
Grasp the edge of the memory module and pull it out of the socket.
Insert the memory module with the most memory into the memory module socket on the
replacement Interface Manager card. Push down on the module to fasten the latches.
Insert the other memory module into the memory module socket on the old Interface
Manager card. Push down on the module to fasten the latches.
Replacing the Interface Manager card 342213-001 or 393531-001

1. Position the Interface Manager card as shown in (page 132). Align the Interface Manager card
with the guides in the bottom slot in the card cage in the base module and slide the Interface
Manager card into the library.
2. Push the ejector handles to the inside to fully engage the Interface Manager card into the
backplane.
4. Plug the cables into the Interface Manager card exactly as they were plugged into the original
Interface Manager card (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
NOTE: Because all of the configuration settings for the Interface Manager card are stored
on the CompactFlash memory card that you moved, your new Interface Manager card retains
the configuration of the original card. To examine or change these settings, see the HP Interface
Manager and Command View TL User Guide.

6. Make sure that the status LEDs indicate a normal state (see (page 47)).
Interface Manager card 480240-001

This section explains how to replace the 480240-001 Interface Manager card installed in an EML
E-Series tape library. This version of the Interface Manager card contains a label with the part
number AS#340252-003, has a USB port next to the serial port, and has the word DUAL printed
on the bezel.
Removing the Interface Manager card480240-001

1. Verify that your library meets the following requirements:
• This board requires a 1 GB CompactFlash to operate; you cannot use a CompactFlash
with a different capacity. Therefore, the Interface Manager card that you are replacing
must contain a 1 GB CompactFlash. (In Step 7, you move the CompactFlash from the
original card to the new card.) If you need to order a 1 GB CompactFlash, contact HP
service.
• You cannot use the 480240-001 Interface Manager card in the ESL9000 tape library.
If you have an ESL9000 library, use either the 342213-001 or 393531-001 Interface
Manager card instead.
• The 480240-001 Interface Manager card requires firmware version I231 or later to
operate. Do not downgrade the firmware to an earlier version.
4. Identify the Interface Manager card. It is located in the bottom slot of the base module card
cage.
5. Label and unplug the cables.
a. Label the cables or write a note that shows the locations of all the cables plugged into
the Interface Manager card to make it easier to reconnect them later.
b. Unplug all cables from the Interface Manager card.
6. Remove the Interface Manager card.
a. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws in the black ejector handles
at the ends of the Interface Manager card.
b. Push the ejector handles to the outside, then pull on them to remove the controller.
Avoid removing or installing the Interface Manager card at an angle and watch that the metal
tabs on the gasket do not get caught or bent.

7. Move the CompactFlash card.
a. The Interface Manager card contains a CompactFlash card which stores the library
configuration. To retain the library configuration, move the CompactFlash card to the
replacement Interface Management card.
b. Grasp the edges of the CompactFlash card and slide it out of the slot on the original
Interface Manager card. If needed, push a pen into the corner notches of the slot to unseat
the CompactFlash card.
c. Remove the replacement Interface Manager card from its protective sleeve and place it
on your work surface.
d. With the connector going in first, align the sides of the CompactFlash card with the slot
on the replacement Interface Manager card. Gently slide the CompactFlash card into the
slot until it is securely seated.
NOTE:
If the CompactFlash card does not slide in easily, it is upside down. Pull the card back out,
flip it over, and reinsert it into the slot.
Replacing the Interface Manager card 480240-001

1. Reinstall the Interface Manager card.
a. Align the Interface Manager with the guides in the base module card cage and slide the
Interface Manager into the library.
b. Push the ejection handles to the inside to fully seat the card. Tighten the captive screws.
2. Plug the cables into the new Interface Manager card exactly as they were plugged into the
original card.

a. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the ON position. Check the
power supply power indicators to verify that the power is on.
b. Verify that the library robotics controller Active indicator is lit. The library will take 20
minutes or more to boot, depending on the configuration.
4. Verify that the status LEDs of the Interface Manager card indicate a normal state. The red LED
should be off and the green LED should be blinking or solid.
5. Close the back doors of the library.
6. Verify the library configuration. Because all of the configuration settings of the Interface
Manager card are stored in the CompactFlash card that you moved, the replacement Interface
Manager card retains the configuration of the original card. To verify or change these settings,
refer to the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL User Guide.
CompactFlash card
Part Number 488160-001 (256 MB for use on the 342213-001 or 393531-001
(AS#340252-001 or AS#340252-002) Interface Manager
card)439651-001 (1 GB for use on the 480240-001
(AS#340252-003) Interface Manager card)
Location On the Interface Manager card
Characteristics CompactFlash memory card in a holder
Function Stores the firmware and configuration settings for the Interface
Manager card
Illustration
Required tools
CompactFlash card 488160-001

You can use this 256 MB CompactFlash only on the 342213-001 or 393531-001 Interface
Manager cards. These versions of the Interface Manager card contain a label with the part number
AS#340252-001 or AS#340252-002 and have an AUX port next to the serial port. You cannot
use this CompactFlash on the 480240-001 Interface Manager card.
Removing the CompactFlash card 488160-001

1. If possible, determine whether the Interface Manager card IP address is static or dynamic.
You might be able to determine this from the Operator Control Panel (OCP), the Interface
Manager user interface, or other records.
• If the IP address is dynamic, go to the next step.
• If the IP address is static, write down the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask.
You will need this information to reconfigure the Interface Manager card.
2. Use your backup software or the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to empty the picker or to verify
that the picker is empty.
3. Open the back doors of the library.

4. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the OFF position. Make sure that all
power indicators on the power supplies are off.
cage.
Interface Manager card to make it easier to reconnect them later. Unplug all cables from the
Interface Manager card.
7. Remove the Interface Manager card. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws
in the black ejector handles at the ends of the Interface Manager card. Push the ejector handles
to the outside, then pull on them to remove the card.
8. Remove the original CompactFlash card. Grasp the edges of the CompactFlash card and slide
it out of the slot. If needed, push a pen into the corner notches of the slot to unseat the
CompactFlash card.
Figure 60 Removing the CompactFlash card
Replacing the CompactFlash card 488160-001

1. Insert the new CompactFlash card. With the connector going in first, align the sides of the
CompactFlash card with the slot on the Interface Manager card. Gently slide the CompactFlash
card into the slot until it is securely seated.
NOTE: If the CompactFlash card does not slide in easily, it is upside down. Pull the card
back out, flip it over, and reinsert it into the slot.
2. Reinstall the Interface Manager card. Align the Interface Manager card with the guides in the
base module card cage and slide the Interface Manager card into the library. Push the ejection
handles to the inside to fully seat the card. Tighten the captive screws.
card.
4. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the ON position. Check the power
supply power indicators to verify that the power is on.
Verify that the library robotics controller Active indicator is lit. The library will take 20 minutes
or more to boot, depending on the configuration.
5. Verify the library status. Look at the status LEDs on the Interface Manager card. The red LED
CompactFlash card 137

NOTE: If the green status LED is blinking at 1x per 5 seconds and the library has no motion,
it is possible that there is not a host DHCP connection. If the Interface Manager card does not
have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access
the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set network config eml. If
the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware
is at an earlier version than 2.4, call HP support and reference the instructions in the Support
Communication Engineering Advisory The EML library can get stuck in an error state when
being assembled, set to default, or if the Interface Manager Flash is replaced and does not
have access to the DHCP server.
6. Configure the network. Do one of the following depending on whether the Interface Manager
card IP address is dynamic or static:
• If the IP address is static, use the OCP to configure the IP address, using the information
you determined in Removing the CompactFlash card—488160-001, Step 1.
7. After replacing the CompactFlash card, you must update the Interface Manager card firmware
and reconfigure the Interface Manager card settings. You can update the firmware with either
the CLI or the GUI.
To update the firmware with the CLI:

1. Using a PC or laptop connected to the LAN, download the latest firmware from the web
site: http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl
2. Use FTP to transfer the firmware file to a temporary storage area in the Interface Manager
card memory.
a. To determine the IP address to use, look at the OCP on the front of the library. From
the Home screen, select the Status tab, and then select Identity Screen.
b. On the host PC or laptop, open a command shell and navigate to the directory where
the firmware you downloaded in Step 7.1 is located.
c. Enter the following command: ftp IPaddresswhere IPaddress is the IP address
from the OCP.
d. Login with the following credentials:
User name: ftp
Password: Use your E-mail address
e. Enter binary mode with the command: bin
f. If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP directory.
g. Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in
the Interface Manager card memory: put filename where filename is the
filename of the firmware file.
h. Use the quit command to log off the FTP session.
3. Start a Telnet session on the PC or laptop:
a. From a command prompt, enter the following: telnet IPaddresswhere
IPaddress is the IP address from the OCP.
b. At the login prompt, enter the following information:
Username: admin
Password: admin
4. Enter the following command to update the firmware: download mgmt
5. Start a Telnet connection. (The Telnet connection will have been lost during the firmware
update.)

6. Enter the following command to verify that the firmware was updated correctly: show
mgmt revision
7. Enter the following command to set the system date and time: set mgmt clock
MMDDhhmmyy
where: MM is the monthDD is the datehh is the hour in 24-hour formatmm is the minuteyy
is the last two digits of the year
8. Log off the Telnet connection and disconnect the host PC or laptop from the LAN.
To update the firmware with the GUI:

1. If you do not already have the latest version of the Command View TL software, install it
by following the instructions in “Installing Command View TL” in the HP Interface Manager
and Command View TL User Guide.
2. To start Command View TL, click Start→All Programs→HP Command View TL→Command
View TL.
3. The IP address of the library might have changed after replacing the CompactFlash. To
avoid having the library appear more than once in the Command View TL Launcher
window, remove the original instance of the library, and then add it again.
a. In the Launcher window, click the Library Selection tab.
b. Select the name of the original library, and then select Actions > Remove Library.
Confirm that you want to remove the library.
c. Click Actions > Add Library.
d. To determine the IP address to use, look at the OCP on the front of the library. From
e. Enter the IP address from the OCP, and then click OK.
4. To manage the library, double-click the name of the library that contains the Interface
Manager card in which you replaced the CompactFlash. You must log in as either the
admin or service user. Other users cannot update firmware.
5. Click the Support tab.
6. In the left panel, select Firmware Update.
7. Select Actions > Launch Firmware Update Wizard.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard. On page 2 of the wizard, select the Interface
Manager checkbox.
9. Verify the library configuration.
Because all of the configuration settings for the Interface Manager card are stored in the
CompactFlash card, the previous configuration is lost when the CompactFlash card is replaced.
See the “Initial configuration steps” section of the HP Interface Manager and Command View
TL User Guide for instructions on how to reconfigure the Interface Manager card.
CompactFlash card 439651-001

Use this 1 GB CompactFlash only on the 480240-001 Interface Manager card. This version of
the Interface Manager card contains a label with the part number AS#340252-003, has a USB
port next to the serial port, and has the word “DUAL” printed on the bezel. You cannot use this
CompactFlash on the 342213-001 or 393531-001 (AS#340252–001 or AS#340252–002)
Interface Manager cards.

Removing the CompactFlash card 439651-001
1. If possible, determine whether the Interface Manager card IP address is static or dynamic.
You might be able to determine this from the Operator Control Panel (OCP), the Interface
Manager user interface, or other records.
• If the IP address is static, write down the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask.
You will need this information to reconfigure the Interface Manager card.
2. Use your backup software or the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to empty the picker or to verify
that the picker is empty.
3. Open the back doors of the library.
4. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the OFF position. Make sure that all
power indicators on the power supplies are off.
cage.
Interface Manager card to make it easier to reconnect them later. Unplug all cables from the
Interface Manager card.
7. Remove the Interface Manager card. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws
in the black ejector handles at the ends of the Interface Manager card. Push the ejector handles
to the outside, then pull on them to remove the card.
8. Remove the original CompactFlash card. Grasp the edges of the CompactFlash card and slide
it out of the slot. If needed, push a pen into the corner notches of the slot to unseat the
CompactFlash card.
Figure 61 Removing the CompactFlash card
Replacing the CompactFlash card 439651-001

1. Insert the new CompactFlash card. With the connector going in first, align the sides of the
CompactFlash card with the slot on the Interface Manager card. Gently slide the CompactFlash
card into the slot until it is securely seated.
NOTE: If the CompactFlash card does not slide in easily, it is upside down. Pull the card
back out, flip it over, and reinsert it into the slot.

2. Reinstall the Interface Manager card. Align the Interface Manager card with the guides in the
base module card cage and slide the Interface Manager card into the library. Push the ejection
handles to the inside to fully seat the card. Tighten the captive screws.
card.
4. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the ON position. Check the power
supply power indicators to verify that the power is on.
Verify that the library robotics controller Active indicator is lit. The library will take 20 minutes
or more to boot, depending on the configuration.
5. Verify the library status. Look at the status LEDs on the Interface Manager card. The red LED
NOTE: If the green status LED is blinking at 1x per 5 seconds and the library has no motion,
it is possible that there is not a host DHCP connection. If the Interface Manager card does not
have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access
the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set network config eml. If
the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware
is at an earlier version than 2.4, call HP support and reference the instructions in the Support
Communication Engineering Advisory The EML library can get stuck in an error state when
being assembled, set to default, or if the Interface Manager Flash is replaced and does not
have access to the DHCP server.
6. Configure the network. Do one of the following depending on whether the Interface Manager
card IP address is dynamic or static:
• If the IP address is static, use the OCP to configure the IP address, using the information
you determined in Removing the CompactFlash card—439651-001.
7. After replacing the CompactFlash card, you must update the Interface Manager card firmware
and reconfigure the Interface Manager card settings. You can update the firmware with either
the CLI or the GUI.
CAUTION: This 1 GB CompactFlash and the 340252-003 Interface Manager card require
firmware version I231 or later to operate. Do not downgrade the firmware to an earlier
version.
To update the firmware with the CLI:

1. Using a PC or laptop connected to the LAN, download the latest firmware from the web
site: http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl
2. Use FTP to transfer the firmware file to a temporary storage area in the Interface Manager
card memory.
a. To determine the IP address to use, look at the OCP on the front of the library. From
b. On the host PC or laptop, open a command shell and navigate to the directory where
the firmware you downloaded in Step 7.1 is located.
c. Enter the following command: ftp IPaddresswhere IPaddress is the IP address
from the OCP.
d. Login with the following credentials: User name: ftpPassword: Use your E-mail
address
e. Enter binary mode with the command: bin
f. If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP directory.

g. Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in
the Interface Manager card memory: put filename where filename is the
filename of the firmware file.
h. Use the quit command to log off the FTP session.
3. Start a Telnet session on the PC or laptop:
a. From a command prompt, enter the following: telnet IPaddresswhere
IPaddress is the IP address from the OCP.
b. At the login prompt, enter the following information:Username: adminPassword:
admin
4. Enter the following command to update the firmware: download mgmt
5. Start a Telnet connection. (The Telnet connection will have been lost during the firmware
update.)
6. Enter the following command to verify that the firmware was updated correctly: show
mgmt revision
7. Enter the following command to set the system date and time: set mgmt clock
MMDDhhmmyy
where: MM is the monthDD is the datehh is the hour in 24-hour formatmm is the minuteyy
is the last two digits of the year
8. Log off the Telnet connection and disconnect the host PC or laptop from the LAN.
To update the firmware with the GUI:

1. If you do not already have the latest version of the Command View TL software, install it
by following the instructions in “Installing Command View TL” in the HP Interface Manager
and Command View TL User Guide.
2. To start Command View TL, click Start > All Programs > HP Command View TL > Command
View TL.
3. The IP address of the library might have changed after replacing the CompactFlash. To
avoid having the library appear more than once in the Command View TL Launcher
window, remove the original instance of the library, and then add it again.
a. In the Launcher window, click the Library Selection tab.
b. Select the name of the original library, and then select Actions > Remove Library.
Confirm that you want to remove the library.
c. Click Actions > Add Library.
d. To determine the IP address to use, look at the OCP on the front of the library. From
e. Enter the IP address from the OCP, and then click OK.
4. To manage the library, double-click the name of the library that contains the Interface
Manager card in which you replaced the CompactFlash. You must log in as either the
admin or service user. Other users cannot update firmware.
5. Update the firmware.
a. Click the Support tab.
b. In the left panel, select Firmware Update.
c. Select Actions > Launch Firmware Update Wizard.
d. Follow the instructions in the wizard. On page 2 of the wizard, select the Interface
Manager checkbox.
6. Set the system date and time.
a. Click the Configuration tab.
b. In the left panel, select Library Settings.
c. Select Actions > Edit System Date/Time.

9. Verify the library configuration.
Because all of the configuration settings for the Interface Manager card are stored in the
CompactFlash card, the previous configuration is lost when the CompactFlash card is replaced.
See the “Initial configuration steps” section of the HP Interface Manager and Command View
TL User Guide for instructions on how to reconfigure the Interface Manager card.
Memory module on the Interface Manager card

Part Number 488160-001 (256 MB) or 439651-001 (1 GB)
Location On the Interface Manager card

Use the 256 MB memory module only on the 340252-001 and
340252-002 Interface Manager cards. These versions of the
Interface Manager card contain a label with the part number
AS#340252-001 or AS#340252-002 and have an AUX port next
to the serial port. Use the 1 GB memory module only on the
340252-003 Interface Manager card. This version of the Interface
Manager card contains a label with the part number
AS#340252-003, has a USB port next to the serial port, and has
the word “DUAL” printed on the bezel.
Characteristics Memory module
Function RAM for applications running on the Interface Manager card

processor
Illustration
Required tools
Removing the memory module

2. Power off the library.
3. Identify the Interface Manager card. The Interface Manager card is located either in the bottom
slot of the card cage, or in the top cluster, to the immediate right of the cluster controller.
4. Label the cables or write a note that shows the locations and orientation of all the cables
plugged into the Interface Manager card to make it easier to reconnect them later.
5. Unplug all cables from the Interface Manager card.
6. Loosen the captive screws in the black ejector handles at both ends of the Interface Manager
card. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
7. Push the ejector handles to the outside.
8. Pull the ejector handles to remove the Interface Manager card from the library.
Memory module on the Interface Manager card 143

NOTE: Be aware that the metal tabs on the gasket on the filler panel can be caught and
Avoid removing or installing the Interface Manager card at an extreme angle and watch that
the metal tabs on the gasket do not get caught or bent.
9. Locate the memory module on the Interface Manager card.
Figure 62 Locating the memory module on the Interface Manager card
10. To remove the memory module, pull the latches away from the memory module on bath sides.
When both latches are unfastened, the memory module pops up. Grasp the edge of the
memory module and pull it out of the socket.
Replacing the memory module

1. Inspect the replacement memory module for damage or debris on the connector pins. Insert
the replacement memory module into the memory module socket. Push down on the module
to fasten the latches.
2. Position the Interface Manager card as shown in (page 132). Align the Interface Manager card
with the guides in the bottom slot in the card cage in the base module and slide the Interface
Manager card into the library.
3. Push the ejector handles to the inside to fully engage the Interface Manager card into the
backplane.
5. Reconnect the cables into the Interface Manager card exactly as they were connected to the
original Interface Manager card (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
7. Make sure that the status LEDs indicate a normal state (see (page 47)).

Part number 356690-0011 or 416274-001
Location In the middle slot in the base-module card cage or in any slot in
the card cage expansion module
Characteristics Contains two HBA or switch FC ports, four tape drive FC ports, one
Ethernet port, and one serial port

Function Manages up to four tape drives and provides bidirectional
connectivity for 2 Gbps FC interfaces
Illustration
1
Required tools
Removing an e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller

1. Identify the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller to be replaced by one of the following methods:
• The power LED is on and the ACT/LNK LEDs are off instead of green (see (page 48)).
• The power LED is off.
• You might need to find out which tape drives are connected to each interface controller
to identify which interface controller to replace.
2. If you have Command View TL 2.0 and Interface Manager card firmware I200 or later, start
the Hardware Replacement wizard. In the Command View TL Library window, click the Support
tab. In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement. Select Actions > Launch Interface Controller
Replacement Wizard.
interface controller to make it easier to reconnect them later.
6. Unplug all cables from the interface controller.
7. Loosen the captive screws in the black ejector handles at both ends of the interface controller.
8. Push the ejector handles to the outside.
9. Pull the ejector handles to remove the interface controller from the library.
Figure 63 Removing the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller 145

Replacing an e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller
NOTE: You can install the interface controller in two locations in the library:
• The middle slot in the card cage in the base module. You must always have an interface
controller installed there.
• Any of the slots in the card cage expansion module. You must have one interface controller
installed there for every four additional LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives that you install.
1. Position the interface controller as shown in (page 145). Align the interface controller with the
guides in the slot in the card cage and slide the interface controller into the library.
2. Push the ejector handles to the inside to fully engage the interface controller into the backplane.
3. Tighten the captive screws in both ejector handles.
4. If you are running the Hardware Replacement Wizard (see Step 2), connect all cables except
the FC0 and FC1 host ports. If you are not running the Hardware Replacement wizard, connect
all cables. Plug the cables into the interface controller exactly as they were plugged into the
original interface controller (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
5. When you install a new interface controller, you must use a different power-on procedure one
time:
a. Turn on the power to the library.
b. Wait approximately two minutes and turn off the power to the library.
c. Wait several seconds and turn on the power to the library again.
NOTE: This power-on procedure is performed to allow the Interface Manager card time
to configure the interface controller. Once configured, the interface controller is reset
(powered off and on) to enable the new settings to take effect.
6. In this step, Command View TL or the Interface Manager card will make sure that all interface
controller settings have been retained during the interface controller replacement.
If you are running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard (see Step 2),
complete it now by following the instructions on the screen.
If you are not running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard, but your Interface
Manager card contains firmware version I200 or later, connect to the Interface Manager card
using serial or Telnet and start the CLI replacement wizard by executing the replace
interface command.
If you are not running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard and your
Interface Manager card contains a firmware version earlier than I200, connect to the Interface
Manager CLI and wait for any automatic FRU management processes to complete before
continuing.
7. Make sure the power LED and link LEDs on the interface controller are solid green. The link
LEDs indicate a good connection (see (page 48)).
8. Use the Interface Manager CLI or the Command View TL to make sure that the new interface
controller is detected, and to perform configuration and firmware updates, if necessary.

Part number 379584-0011 or 415802-001
Location In the middle slot in the base-module card cage or in any slot in
the card cage expansion module
Characteristics Contains two HBA or switch FC ports, four tape drive FC ports, one
Ethernet port, and one serial port

Function Manages up to four LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives and provides
bidirectional connectivity for 4 Gbps FC interfaces
Illustration
1
CAUTION: To support the added cooling requirements of the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller,
the base module in the library must contain two 12V fans instead of the two 5V fans that some of
the units shipped with. To see which size fans your library contains, when the library is powered
off, view the model number on the fan which is visible from the rear of the library:
• 5V fan AFB0605HC
• 12V fan FFB0612EHE
The part number for the 12V fans is 409861-001 which includes two fans.
All units of the card cage expansion module shipped with 12V fans, so replacing the fans in that
module is not necessary.
Required tools
Removing an e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller

1. Identify the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller to be replaced by one of the following methods:
• The power LED is on and the ACT/LNK LEDs are off instead of green (see (page 48)).
• The power LED is off.
• You might need to find out which tape drives are connected to each interface controller
to identify which interface controller to replace.
3. If you have Command View TL 2.0 and Interface Manager card firmware I200 or later, start
the Hardware Replacement wizard. In the Command View TL Library window, click the Support
tab. In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement. Select Actions > Launch Interface Controller
Replacement Wizard.
5. Unplug the cables.
the interface controller to make it easier to reconnect them later.
b. Unplug all cables from the interface controller by pressing on the connector tabs and
removing the cables.
6. Remove the interface controller.
a. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws in the black ejector handle at
both ends of the interface controller.
b. Push the ejector handles to the outside and then pull on them to remove the interface
controller from the library.
e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller 147

Figure 64 Removing the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller
Replacing an e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller

NOTE: You can install the interface controller in two locations in the library:
• The middle slot in the card cage in the base module. You must always have an interface
controller installed there.
• Any of the slots in the card cage expansion module. You must have one interface controller
installed here for every four additional LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives that you install.
1. Insert the new interface controller.
a. Position the interface controller as shown in (page 148) and align it with the guides in the
slot.
b. Slide the interface controller into the library.
c. Push the ejector handles to the inside to fully engage the interface controller into the
backplane.
d. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screw in both ejector handles.
2. If you are running the Hardware Replacement Wizard (see Step 3), connect all cables except
the FC0 and FC1 host ports. If you are not running the Hardware Replacement wizard, connect
all cables. Plug the cables into the interface controller exactly as they were plugged into the
original interface controller (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
a. Set the library power switch at the upper right corner to the ON position.
b. Observe that all power indicators on the power supplies show that power is restored.
c. Wait 10 minutes.
d. Verify that the library robotics controller card ACTIVE indicator is lit.

4. Prepare for configuration. When you install or replace an interface controller, you must use
a different power-on procedure one time. Reset the interface controller twice to prepare it for
configuration.
a. Insert a paper clip into the Reset hole (see (page 48)).
b. Wait three minutes for the interface controller to reset.
IMPORTANT: If you do not allow sufficient time for the interface controller to reset before
resetting it again, the Interface Manager card will not recognize the interface controller.
5. In this step, Command View TL or the Interface Manager card will make sure that all interface
controller settings have been retained during the interface controller replacement.
If you are running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard (see Step 3),
complete it now by following the instructions on the screen.
If you are not running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard, but your Interface
Manager card contains firmware version I200 or later, connect to the Interface Manager card
using serial or Telnet and start the CLI replacement wizard by executing the replace
interface command.
If you are not running the Command View TL Hardware Replacement Wizard and your
Interface Manager card contains a firmware version earlier than I200, connect to the Interface
Manager CLI and wait for any automatic FRU management processes to complete before
continuing.
6. Verify the LEDs. Make sure the power LED and link LEDs on the interface controller are solid
green. The link LEDs indicate a good connection (see (page 48)).
8. Update the firmware. Use Command View TL or the CLI to make sure that the new interface
controller is detected, and to perform configuration and firmware updates, if necessary. Refer
to the HP Interface Manager and Command View TL User Guide for detailed procedures.
Power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module

Part number 375815-0011 or 409857–001
Location Left side of the base module or tape drive expansion module
Characteristics • Hot-swappable
• Input rating: 100–240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 7.2A
• Output rating: +3.3 VDC, +5 VDC, +12 VDC, -12 VDC
• 360 Watts total output power
Function Provides power to the base module or tape drive expansion module
components
Illustration
Power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module 149
1
Required tools
Removing a power supply from the base module or tape drive expansion module
1. Identify the power supply to be replaced. The power LED might be off (see (page 52)).
2. Do one of the following:
• If the faulty power supply is redundant, the library does not have to be powered off during
this procedure.
• If the faulty power supply is the only power supply in the base module, stop all library
activity and make sure the picker is empty. Turn off the power to the library.
3. Unplug the power cord from the back of the power supply.
4. Remove the two 6-32 x 3/8-inch Torx screws that attach the power supply to the library. Use
a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
Figure 65 Screw locations on the base-module power supply
WARNING! The power supply might be hot.
5. Pull the handle on the power supply to remove it from the library.

6. The bracket is not part of the replacement kit. You must move the bracket from the original
power supply to the new power supply. Remove the two 6-32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws that
attach the bracket to the power supply with a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
Figure 66 Removing the base-module power supply bracket
Replacing a power supply in the base module or tape drive expansion module
1. Attach the bracket to the new power supply with two 6-32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws. Use a T-15
Torx screwdriver.
2. Slide the power supply into the library.
3. Attach the power supply to the library with two 6-32 x 3/8-inch Torx screws.
4. Plug the power cord into the power supply.
5. If the power to the library was previously turned off, turn on the power to the library.
Power supply in the card cage expansion module

Part number 375816-0011 or 409858-001
Location Bottom of the card cage expansion module
Characteristics • Hot-swappable and redundant

• 3U x 8HP size with two LEDs
Function Provides 100–240 VAC, 3 A, 47–63 Hz, to the card cage

expansion module
Illustration
1
Required tools
Removing a power supply from the card cage expansion module

1. Identify the power supply to be replaced. The FAULT LED light might be lit (see (page 52)).
Power supply in the card cage expansion module 151

2. Loosen the two captive screws. One screw is in the black ejector handle and the other screw
is located on the top-right corner of the power supply back panel. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
WARNING! The power supply might be hot.
3. Push the black ejector handle to the left.

4. Pull the ejector handle to remove the power supply from the library.
Figure 67 Removing a power supply from a card cage expansion module
Replacing a power supply in the card cage expansion module

1. Position the power supply as shown in (page 152). Align the power supply with the guides in
the card cage and slide the power supply into the library.
2. Push the ejector handle to the right.
3. Tighten the two captive screws. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Fans in the base module

Part number 409861-001
Location Right side of the base module
Characteristics Dual vertically-mounted fans that plug into the 8U-base-module

backplane
Function Provides cooling for the cards in the base module
Illustration
Required tools

Removing the fans from the base module
NOTE: The fan replacement kit contains two fans. Replace both fans in the base module at the
same time.
4. Unplug the FC cables from the tape drives in the base module and remove the cables from
the cable management feature.
5. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws from the cover over the fan compartment that is below the
two fans. Slide the cover to the left to disengage the tabs on the right side of the cover. Remove
the cover.
6. Inside the fan compartment, unplug the cables for both fans from the backplane. The fan cables
have blue, red, and black wires.
7. Support the bottom fan with one hand and remove the two screws that attach it to the base
module. If you are removing a 5V fan, these will be T-15 Torx screws. If you are removing a
12V fan, these will be T-25 Torx screws.
8. Remove the fan from the library.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for the top fan in the base module.
Figure 68 Removing the fans from the base module
Replacing the fans in the base module

NOTE: The fan replacement kit contains two fans. Replace both fans in the base module at the
same time.
1. Insert the top fan into the fan compartment. Position the fan so that the air blows out of the
library.
NOTE: If you are replacing a 5V fan with a 12V fan, make sure you use the longer T-25
Torx screws supplied with the replacement fan.
2. Attach the fan to the base module with two T-25 Torx screws.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the bottom fan.
Fans in the base module 153

4. Plug the cables for both fans into the backplane.
a. For the top fan, use connector J112A on the backplane (you cannot see the number of
this connector on the backplane but it is above J112). Position the locking tab for this
connector to the bottom.
b. For the bottom fan, use connector J113A on the backplane. Position the locking tab for
this connector to the top.
Figure 69 Plugging the fans into the base-module backplane
5. Replace the cover over the fan compartment below the two fans and attach it with three T-15
Torx screws.
6. Plug the FC cables into the tape drives in the base module and replace the cables onto the
cable management features.
Fans in the card cage expansion module

Location Right side of the card cage expansion module
Characteristics Dual vertically mounted fans that plug into the

card-cage-expansion-module backplane
Function Provides cooling for the cards in the card cage expansion module
Illustration
Required tools
Removing the fans from the card cage expansion module

NOTE: The fan replacement kit contains two fans. Replace both fans in the card cage expansion
module at the same time.

4. Remove the T-15 Torx screw that attaches the fan assembly to the card cage expansion module.
5. Remove the fan assembly from the library.
6. Reach inside the fan compartment and unplug the cables for both fans from the backplane.
The fan cables have red, blue, and black wires.
7. Remove the two T-25 Torx screws from both fans to remove the fans from the metal cover.
Figure 70 Removing the fans from the card cage expansion module
Replacing the fans in the card cage expansion module

NOTE: The fan replacement kit contains two fans. Replace both fans in the card cage expansion
module at the same time.
1. Attach the fans to the metal cover. Position the fans so the air blows out of the library and the
wires are at the top-left corner of each fan. Insert two T-25 Torx screws into each fan.
Figure 71 Position of card-cage-expansion-module fans to metal cover
Fans in the card cage expansion module 155

2. Plug the cables for the fans into the backplane.
a. Plug the upper fan into connector J141. Position the locking tab on the connector to the
right.
b. Plug the lower fan into connector J140. Position the locking tab on the connector to the
right.
Figure 72 Connecting the cables for the card-cage-expansion-module fans to the backplane
3. Put the fan assembly into the card cage expansion module.
4. Attach the fan assembly to the card cage expansion module with a T-15 Torx screw making
sure to engage the tab at the top of the cover.
LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive

Part number 375817-0011 or 409859-001 (Ultrium 460 or LTO2)381676-0011
or 409860-001 (Ultrium 960 or LTO3)
Location In the base module or tape drive expansion module
• 1/2-inch cartridge tape drive
Function Writes data to and reads data from Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
cartridges
Illustration
1
Required tools
• Flat-blade screwdriver
Removing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive

1. Identify the tape drive to be replaced. The FAULT LED light might be lit (see (page 49)).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging FC cables, do not pinch or sharply bend the cables tighter
than a 5-cm (2-inches) diameter.
2. Unplug the FC cable from the tape drive.

3. Use your fingers or a flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the captive screw on the right side of
the tape drive.
4. Pull the tape drive out of the library.
Figure 73 Removing a tape drive
Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive

NOTE: HP recommends that you install tape drives from top to bottom, with no gaps between
them. If you are installing LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives and LTO4 or later tape drives in the same
library, HP recommends that you place all LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives above all LTO4 or later
tape drives.
1. Insert the tape drive into an empty drive bay.
2. Tighten the captive screw to attach the tape drive to the drive bay.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging FC cables, do not pinch or sharply bend the cables tighter
than a 5-cm (2-inches) diameter.
3. Connect the FC cable to the tape drive. The FC cable connector clicks into place.
Figure 74 Connecting the FC cable to a tape drive
NOTE: Replacement tape drives placed into previously occupied drive bays are recognized
by the library. Tape drives placed into previously vacant drive bays are not recognized until
after a reboot.
4. Make sure that the tape drive has the current firmware version. See the HP Interface Manager
and Command View TL User Guide for detailed procedures on updating tape drive firmware.
5. Use the Command View TL user interface to reboot the interface controller. See the HP Interface
Manager and Command View TL User Guide for detailed procedures.
LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive 157

6. Make sure the FC port LED for the corresponding tape drive on the interface controller is solid
green (see (page 48) or (page 48)).
7. If the tape drive was installed in a previously vacant drive bay, reboot the library. On the
OCP, select the Operations→Reboot Library command.
8. Check the tape drive status on the OCP to make sure that the tape drive is recognized.
Alternatively, make sure Command View TL recognizes the new tape drive using the console.
LTO4 and later tape drives

NOTE: For information on how to remove and replace LTO4 and later tape drives, see the
separate HP EML E-series LTO4 or Later Tape Drive Replacement Instructions at http://www.hp.com/
support/emle.
Part number 447790-001 (Ultrium 1840)
cartridges
Illustration
cartridges
Illustration

cartridges
Illustration

Part number J9080-69001 Switch 1700-245064-2085 Standard rack-mount
brackets
Location • Only in libraries that contain LTO4 or later tape drives

• In the 1U space directly above the card cage in the base module
• 24 ports
Function Provides a private management network to connect the Interface

Manager card to the LTO4 or later tape drives.
Illustration
Required tools

Removing the switch for the internal network
1. Open the back doors of the rack.
2. Identify the switch.

The switch is installed in the 1U space directly above the card cage in the base module.
3. Unplug the switch from the power strip.

4. Label the cables plugged into the switch.
Label the cables or write a note that shows the locations of all the cables plugged into the
switch to make it easier to reconnect them later.
5. Unplug all cables from the switch.
6. Remove the switch from the rack.

Remove the screws that attach the switch to the cabinet with a #2 Phillips screwdriver and
remove the switch from the rack.

7. Unplug the power cord from the back of the switch.
8. Remove the brackets from the switch.


Replacing the switch for the internal network
1. Attach the brackets to the new switch.
2. Plug the power cord into the back of the switch.
3. Install the clip nuts in the rack.

If you are replacing the switch, skip this step because the clip nuts will already be installed.
Install the clip nuts at the 41C position in the rack.
4. Insert the switch into the library and attach it to the rack.
Route the power cord so that it can reach to the power strip on the left side of the cabinet.
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.

5. Plug the cables into the switch.
NOTE: If an LTO4 or later tape drive is not already installed, follow the instructions on the
tape drive installation poster to install it.
If the switch was previously installed, use the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote
to reconnect the cables exactly as they were connected before. If you are installing the switch
for the first time, plug an Ethernet cable from the MGMT port on each LTO4 or later tape drive
to a numbered port on the switch. HP recommends that you connect the tape drives in order
starting with connecting the top tape drive to port 1. LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives do not
connect to this switch.
6. Connect the switch to the Interface Manager card.

Connect an Ethernet cable from port 24 on the switch to any TO FIBRE CHANNEL PORT on
the Interface Manager card (bottom card in the card cage in the base module).

7. Install the cable clamps and route the cables.
Attach the cable clamps to the right rear rack at the positions 37T, 26T, and 15T. Use these
cable clamps to route the tape drive Ethernet cables.
8. Plug the power cord from the switch into the power strip.

9. Verify that the power and link LEDs on the switch are solid green.
10. Close the back doors of the rack.
Robotics unit
Part number 375820-0011 or 459863-001
Location Top of the base module
Characteristics Module containing table, picker, scanner, and lift components
Function Contains robot that picks and places tape cartridges
Illustration
375820-001

459863-001
1
Robotics unit 375820-001

Required tools 375820-001
Removing the robotics unit 375820-001

library.
CAUTION: The door-locking lever must be down before you install the robotics unit.
NOTE: If you are unable to open the center door, the robot is not in the parked position. To
manually park the robot, see (page 53).
5. Keep the center door open and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise to lower
the door-locking lever that is on the top of the center door.
To remove the front cover, see Figure 79 (page 170).
Robotics unit 167

6. Retract the lift-flex cable into the robotic unit.
a. Pull off the cover of the robotics unit.
b. Pull the retraction handle on the left side of the robotics unit out of the opening and away
from the front of the library until you feel resistance. This step retracts the lift-flex cable
into the robotics unit (see Figure 80 (page 171)).
c. Push the retraction handle back into the opening.
Figure 75 Pulling the retraction handle 1 and ratching lever 2.
7. Use a finger to hold the lift-flex cable, so that the cable is not damaged while using a #2
Phillips screwdriver to turn the two screws on the front of the robotics unit counter clockwise
one-quarter turn.
8. Put your hand into the center cutout of the robotics unit and slide the robotics unit forward
until you can grasp both sides of the robotics unit.
NOTE: Be careful of the lift flex cable at the back bottom left of the robotics unit as it pulls
past the sheet metal.
WARNING! The robotics unit weighs 10.1 kg (22.24 lb). Be careful when lifting.
9. Remove the robotics unit from the library.

10. If you will be moving or shipping the robotics unit, install the shipping restraints.
a. Place the robot upside down on a table.
b. Install the spring clip to secure the reduction gear.
c. Insert the two shipping straps into the slots on the front and back of the robotics unit.

Replacing the robotics unit 375820-001
1. Prepare the robot for installation.
b. Remove the spring clip that secures the reduction gear.
c. Remove the two shipping straps from the slots on the front and back of the robotics unit.
d. Push on the latch and release. This will release the tension on the cables.
e. Verify that the cables did not become too loose. You will only be able to see 3 of the 4
pulleys. If the cable is a bit loose use the ratcheting mechanism to tighten the cables. Do
not overtighten the cables or the robot will not drop.
Figure 76 Latch release
f. Locate the motor/encoder on the robot.
Figure 77 Motor/encoder
g. Ensure the connector is fully seated.
Figure 78 Fully seated connector
h. Pull on the retraction handle to ensure the ribbon cable is tucked up inside the robot
chassis so it does not get pinched (Figure 75 (page 168)).
i. Flip the robot unit right side up.
Robotics unit 169

2. Remove the robot cover if needed (Figure 79 (page 170)).
Push the robotics unit the rest of the way into the top of the library. Be sure that the robotics
unit engages completely. (Slight resistance occurs as the robotics unit connects to the
backplane.)
WARNING! The robotics unit weighs 10.1kg (22.24 lb). Be careful when lifting.
3. Turn the two screws on the front of the robotics unit one-quarter turn clockwise to lock the
robotics unit into place.
4. Push the cover onto the robotics unit.
5. Keep the center door of the library open and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn
counterclockwise to raise the door-locking lever that is on the top of the center door.
to lock the center door.
Figure 79 Removing the robotics unit
Robotics unit 459863-001

Before installing this part, make sure that the EML E-Series tape library has the following minimum
firmware version installed:
• Library firmware version 1223 or later
To check the library fimware version, do one of the following:

• On the Operator Control Panel (OCP), select the Status tab, and then select Identity Screen.
• In Command View TL, click the Identity tab.
• In the Interface Manager card Command Line Interface (CLI), enter the command show
firmware revisions.
You can download the latest firmware version from the HP web site http://www.hp.com/support/
emle or http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl. Read the release notes to determine the full firmware
package or bundle required.
Removing the robotics unit 409863-001

library.
CAUTION: The door-locking lever must be down before you install the robotics unit (see
Figure 79 (page 170)).
5. Keep the center door open and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise to lower
the door-locking lever that is on the top of the center door.
6. Retract the lift-flex cable into the robotics unit.
b. Pull the retraction handle on the left side of the robotics unit out of the opening and away
from the front of the library until you feel resistance. This step retracts the lift-flex cable
into the robotics unit.

7. Push the left latch on the door of the robotics unit to the right and open the door. This allows
the door of the robotics until to flip forward and down.
Robotics unit 171

Figure 81 Door latch and latch on right side of robotics unit
8. Push the latch on the right side of the robotics unit to the left and pull the robotics unit out of
the library a short distance.
9. Put your fingers into the open door of the robotics unit and pull the robotics unit out of the
library until you can grasp both sides.
NOTE: Be careful of the lift flex cable at the back bottom left of the robotics unit as it pulls
past the sheet metal.
10. Remove the robotics unit from the library.

11. If you will be moving or shipping the robotics unit, install the shipping restraints.
a. Place the robotics unit upside down on a table.
b. Push down and slightly turn the yellow gear lock until it engages the reduction gear.
c. Insert the two shipping straps. Insert the L-shaped end into the slot at the rear of the robotics
unit, then insert the other end into the slot on the front.

Replacing the robotics unit 409863-001
1. Prepare the robotics for installation.
b. Remove the two shipping straps from the slots on the front and back of the robotics unit.
c. Pull up on the yellow gear lock to disengage it from the reduction gear. The gear lock
remains attached to the robotics unit.
d. Push on the latch and release. This will release the tension on the cables.
e. Verify that the cables did not become too loose. You will only be able to see 3 of the 4
pulleys. If the cable is a bit loose use the ratcheting mechanism to tighten the cables. Do
not overtighten the cables or the robot will not drop.
Figure 82 Latch release
f. Locate the motor/encoder on the robot.
Figure 83 Motor/encoder
g. Ensure the connector is fully seated.
Figure 84 Fully seated connector
Robotics unit 173

h. Pull on the retraction handle to ensure the ribbon cable is tucked up inside the robot
chassis so it does not get pinched (Figure 80 (page 171)).
i. Flip the robot unit right side up.
2. Push the robotics unit most of the way into the top of the library making sure the ribbon cables
are not hanging out side the picker frame or they can become pinched..
3. Push the latch on the door of the robotics unit to the right and open the door.
CAUTION: Make sure the guide rail on the bottom of the robotics unit fits into the slot on
the faceplate. If they are not aligned, the movement of the robot could be blocked.
4. Push the robotics unit the rest of the way into the library.
5. Make sure that the latch on the right side of the robotics unit is fully engaged. If it is not, push
the latch to the right. You should not be able to move the robotics unit.
It is possible for the umbilical cable to bind inside the robot and not allow the robot tray to
drop down as far as it should. When the robot tray does not drop down on its own, reach
into the far left corner of the library, just in front of the Z-pole and slide your finger between
the cable and the robot. Gently pull the cable out of the chassis until the cable is nearly halfway
down the library. Do not pull the cable more than halfway down the library or it could bunch
up at the bottom of the library.
Figure 85 Proper umbilical cable placement
6. Close the door of the robotics unit.

7. Make sure the robotics unit is properly installed:
• The guide rail fits into the alignment slot.
• The tabs on the bottom of the door of the robotics unit are behind the faceplate.
• The latch on the door of the robotics unit is fully engaged and secure.
• The latch on the right side of the robotics unit is fully engaged and you cannot move the
robotics unit.
• The ratchet tool on the upper-right corner of the robotics unit is pushed in completely.

Figure 86 Robot installation checklist
1. Guide rail in alignment slot 2. Tabs on door

3. Latch on door 4. Latch on right side of robotics unit
5. Ratchet tool
8. Push the cover onto the robotics unit.

a. The yellow tray normally pushes the lever upward during a tray-parking operation.
Figure 87 Proper tray placement
b. The graphic below shows that the lever has slipped past the top of the tray and is tightly
jammed against the tray yellow surface. Un-jam the lever by rotating the lever upward
while pushing the tray away from the lever.
Figure 88
9. Keep the center door of the library open and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn
counterclockwise to raise the door-locking lever that is on the top of the center door.
to lock the door.
12. Place the shipping straps on the robotics unit you are shipping back or save them for use later.
Robotics unit 175

Operator control panel
Part number 375821-0011 or 409864-001
Location Front of the 4U base module
Characteristics Touch screen panel
Function User interface for controlling library operation
Illustration
1
Required tools
Removing the operator control panel

library.
5. Remove the two T-10 Torx screws from the bottom-left and top-right corners of the black
protective cover that is on the back of the OCP. The top-right screw is behind the flat ribbon
cable. Push the cable to the right to uncover the screw.
6. Unplug the two ribbon cables from the back of the OCP. Press the tab on the larger connector
to release the cable. Pull up on the two levers on the smaller connector (J18) to release the
cable.
7. Hold the OCP and remove the two T-10 Torx screws located at the top-left and bottom-right
corners.

8. Remove the OCP from the library.
Figure 89 Removing the OCP
Replacing the operator control panel

1. Hold the OCP in place and replace the two T-10 Torx screws located at the top-left and
bottom-right corners. When you insert the bottom-right screw, make sure the ring tongue
terminal is between the OCP and the door.
2. Plug the two ribbon cables into the back of the OCP.
3. Thread the ribbon cables through the slot in the black protective cover.
4. Install the black protective cover on the back of the OCP with two T-10 Torx screws in the
bottom-left and top-right corners (the top-right screw is behind the flat ribbon cable).
Load port door on the base module

Part number 375829-0011 or 409870-001
Location Right side of the base module
Characteristics Spring release door over magazine
Function Access door for loading additional tape cartridges
Illustration
Load port door on the base module 177

1
Load port door on the base module

Removing the load port door from the base module
library.
4. Put your hand into the center opening and press the latch at the top of the load port to the
right to open the load port door.
5. Push down on the spring latch on the bottom of the load port door to disengage the door from
the bottom pin.
NOTE: Make sure you do not lose the small plastic bushing on the top pin in the next step.
6. Rotate the load port door toward the closed position, and lift the load port door up and off
the top pin.
Replacing the load port door on the base module

1. Place the small plastic bushing on the top pin.
2. Lower the top of the load port door onto the top pin.
3. Push down on the spring latch of the bottom of the load port door and insert the bottom pin
onto the spring latch.
Load port door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion

module
Part number 375830-0011 or 409871-001
Location Right side of the tape drive expansion module or capacity

expansion module
Characteristics Spring release door over magazine
Function Access door for loading tape cartridges
Illustration
1
To remove or replace the load port door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion
module, see (page 178).

Center door on the base module
Part number 375826-0011 or 409867-001
Location Center-front of the base module
Characteristics Door latch, two viewing windows, and OCP
Function Provides access to the slots and tape drives inside the library
Illustration
1
Required tools
Removing the center door from the base module

library.
5. Unplug the OCP cables.
a. Remove the two T-10 Torx screws from the bottom-left and top-right corners of the black
protective cover that is on the back of the OCP and remove the cover. The top-right screw
is behind the flat ribbon cable. Push the cable to the right to uncover the screw.
Figure 90 Screws in the black protective cover on the OCP
Center door on the base module 179

b. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws from the metal cover on the upper door.
c. Unplug the two ribbon cables from the back of the OCP. Press the tab on the larger
connector to release the cable. Pull up on the two levers on the smaller connector (J18)
to release the cable.
d. Unplug the cable at the top of the door (J740).
Figure 91 J740 and cable stay on base-module center door
e. Remove the T-10 Torx screw and the cable stay from the top-right corner of the door.
6. Remove the T-15 Torx screws from the two door hinges on the 8U base module center door
and remove the center door. Be careful not to lose the hinges because they are not attached
to the door.
7. Repeat the previous step on the 4U base module center door.
Replacing the center door on the base module

1. Install the center door on the 4U base module.
a. Insert the two hinges into the door.
b. Hold the door up to the front of the library and insert the alignment pins on the hinges
into the holes in the front of the library.
c. Tighten the T-15 Torx screws in the hinges.
2. Repeat the previous step on the 8U base module center door. Align the tongue on the lower
door with the groove in the upper door.
3. Plug in the cable at the top of the center door (J740).
4. Attach the cable stay to the top-right corner of the center door with a T-10 Torx screw.
5. Plug the two flat ribbon cables into the back of the OCP.
6. Fold the cables so they fit under the covers.

Figure 92 Folding the OCP cables
7. Attach the metal cover over the ribbon cables with two T-15 Torx screws.
8. Attach the black protective cover to the back of the OCP with two T-10 Torx screws in the
bottom-left and top-right corners.
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion

module
Part number 375827-0011 or 409868-001
Location Center-front of the tape drive expansion module or capacity

expansion module
Characteristics Three viewing windows
Function Provides access to the slots and tape drives inside the library
Illustration
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 181
1
Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module

375827-001
375827-001
4. Turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise and open the center door.
NOTE: This procedure assumes that all the center doors have been removed below the center
door being removed. If not, remove these center doors first, by referring to the applicable
center door removal procedures in this chapter.
5. Remove the T-15 Torx screw securing the latch of this center door to the latch of the door
above it.
6. Remove the 6/32 x 3/8-inch Torx screw at the top center of the door that secures this door
to the door above it.
7. Remove the T-15 Torx screw from the hinge attached to the library chassis and remove the
hinge.
8. Separate the door from the grooves of the door above it.
375827-001
NOTE: This procedure assumes that all the center doors are installed above the center door being
installed. If not, install those center doors first, by referring to the applicable center door installation
procedures in this chapter.
1. Open the center door of the module above the one being replaced.
2. Insert a screw into the hinge and slide the hinge into the hole at the bottom right when looking
at the back of the door.
3. Mate the top of the door with the groove on the bottom of the door above it.
4. Insert the hinge alignment pins into their holes on the library chassis, and attach the hinge
with a T-15 Torx screw.
5. Secure the center top of the door to the bottom center of the door above it using a 6/32 x
3/8-inch Torx screw.
6. Push the latch bar up until the hole at the top of the bar aligns with the hole in the latch bar
on the door above it.
7. Secure the latches with a T-15 Torx screw.

Center door on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
409868-001
409868-001
NOTE: The center doors are connected to each other with tongue and groove joints. To remove
a center door, you must work from bottom to top and remove all center doors below it.
library.
5. Remove the T-15 Torx screws from the hinges of the center door. Be careful not to lose the
hinges because they are not attached to the door.
6. Remove the center door from the library.
409868-001
NOTE: The center doors are connected to each other with tongue and groove joints. To replace
a center door, you must work from top to bottom and replace all center doors below it.
1. Insert the hinges into the center door.
2. Hold the center door up to the front of the library. Insert the alignment pins on the hinges into
the holes in the faceplate. Insert the tongue on the lower door into the groove on the upper
door. Be careful not to lose the hinges because they are not attached to the door.
3. Attach the hinges to the library with T-15 Torx screws.
to lock it.
Center door on the card cage expansion module

Part number 375828-0011 or 409869-001
Location Center-front of the card cage expansion module
Characteristics One viewing window
Center door on the card cage expansion module 183

Function Provides access to the slots inside the library
Illustration
1
To remove or replace the center door on the card cage expansion module 375828-001, see
(page 182).
To remove or replace the center door on the card cage expansion module 409869-001, see
(page 183).
Faceplate on the base module

Part number 375822-0011 or 409865-001
Location Front of the base module behind the center door and load port
door
Characteristics Faceplate with load port door and door sensor cable
Function Contains the load port housing
Illustration
1
Faceplate on the base module 375822-001

• 1/8-inch Allen wrench

Removing the faceplate from the base module 375822-001
library.
5. Remove all the center doors, working from bottom to top (see (page 179), (page 181), and
(page 183), as applicable).
6. Remove the load port door (see (page 178)).
7. Remove the load port magazine (see (page 221)).
8. Remove the two center T-15 Torx screws securing the faceplate to the faceplate below it.
9. Remove the four 1/8-inch Allen head screws on the left and right sides of the faceplate attached
to the cabinet.
10. Pull the faceplate away from the rack until the load port cable on the upper right is accessible.
11. Free the cable from the cable clamp and disconnect the cable connector.
Replacing the faceplate on the base module 375822-001

1. Lift the faceplate up to near its final location and insert the OCP ribbon cables through the
door slot.
2. Connect the load port cable connector at the upper right (above the load port door) and place
cable into cable clamp.
3. Fit the faceplate into its cabinet location.
4. Secure the frame using four 1/8-inch Allen head screws on the left and right sides.
5. Secure the frame at the bottom with two T-15 Torx screws.
6. Replace the load port door (see (page 178)).
7. Insert the load port magazine (see (page 221)).
8. Replace all the center doors, working from top to bottom (see (page 179), (page 181), and
9. Close load port doors and library doors.
Faceplate on the base module 409865-001

• 5/16in nutdriver
Removing the faceplate from the base module 409865-001
NOTE: To remove a faceplate, you must slide all lower modules out of the library approximately
7.5 cm (3 inches).
library.
Faceplate on the base module 185

5. Remove the center door from the 8U base module (see (page 179)).
a. Remove the two T-10 Torx screws from the bottom-left and top-right corners of the black
protective cover that is on the back of the OCP and remove the cover. The top-right screw
is behind the flat ribbon cable. Push the cable to the right to uncover the screw.
b. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws from the metal cover on the upper door.
c. Unplug the two ribbon cables from the back of the OCP. Press the tab on the larger
connector to release the cable. Pull up on the two levers on the smaller connector (J18)
to release the cable.
d. Unplug the cable at the top of the door (J740).
e. Remove the T-10 Torx screw and the cable stay from the top-right corner of the door.
f. Remove the T-15 Torx screws from the two door hinges on the 8U base module center
door and remove the center door. Be careful not to lose the hinges because they are not
attached to the door.
6. Remove the robotics unit (see (page 171) or (page 167)).
7. Remove the load port magazine from the base module (see (page 221)).
8. Remove the load port doors or 4U blank covers from all modules (see (page 177), (page 178),
and (page 219)).
9. Unplug the interconnect cables from all modules.
a. At the rear of the library, loosen the thumbscrew in the cover over the interconnect-cable
compartment and remove the cover.
b. Remove the cover over the interconnect-cable compartment between the 8U and 4U base
modules. Loosen the two thumbscrews and remove the cover.
c. Push the ears of the connector to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver.
d. Pull the white tag to unplug the connector.
e. Tuck the cable inside the upper module so it doesn't get damaged.
10. Remove the lift poles from all the modules below the 8U base module.
a. Working from bottom to top, push down on the lift pole until the top of the pole disengages
from the top pole mount.
b. Lift up to remove the lift pole from the bottom pole mount.
11. Remove all center T-15 Torx screws that attach the faceplates to the faceplate above it.
12. Remove all side T-25 Torx screws that attach the modules to the rack.
WARNING! In the next step, be careful not to push the modules out farther than 7.5 cm (3
inches).
13. Working from bottom to top, slide all lower modules approximately 7.5 cm (3 inches) out of
the front of the library. It is easiest to push the modules out from the back of the library.
14. Remove the faceplate from the 8U base module.
a. Remove the two black caps from the left side of the base module with a flat-blade
screwdriver.
b. Remove the four 5/16-inch nuts that attach the faceplate to the base module. Remove the
two plastic cap retainers from the left side.
c. Inside the robotics unit compartment, unplug the load-port-door cable that is on top of the
load port (J111).
d. Pull the faceplate off the studs.
e. Thread the ribbon cables through the slot in the faceplate.
f. Remove the faceplate completely.

Replacing the faceplate on the base module 409865-001
1. Install the faceplate.
a. Hold the 8U faceplate up to the base module close to its final position and thread the
OCP ribbon cables through the slot in the faceplate.
b. Install the 8U faceplate in its final position over the protruding studs.
c. Attach the 8U faceplate to the base module with four 5/16-inch nuts. Use two plastic cap
retainers on the left side.
d. Snap the black caps over the cap retainers.
e. Plug in the load port cable connector (J111) at the upper right (above the load port door)
and place the cable into the cable clamp, if necessary.
2. Slide the lower modules into the library.
a. Working from top to bottom, push all modules fully into the rack.
b. Attach all modules to the rack with four side T-25 Torx screws.
c. Attach all faceplates to the faceplate above it with the two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx
screws.
3. Install the lift poles.
a. Working from top to bottom, insert the lift pole onto the bottom pole mount.
b. Push down on the lift pole and insert the lift pole onto the top pole mount.
4. Plug in the interconnect cables.
a. At the rear of the library, plug each interconnect cable into the module below it.
b. Attach the cover over the interconnect cable and tighten the thumbscrew.
5. Install all load port doors and 4U blank covers (see (page 177), (page 178), and (page 220)).
6. Insert the load port magazine into the base module (see (page 221)). Close all load port doors.
7. Install the robotics unit (see (page 173) or (page 169)).
8. Install the center door on the 8U base module.
a. Insert two hinges into the center door.
b. Hold the center door up to the front of the library and insert the alignment pins on the
hinges into the holes in the front of the library. Align the tongue on the lower door with
the groove in the upper door.
c. Tighten the T-15 Torx screws in the hinges.
d. Plug in the cable at the top of the center door (J740).
e. Attach the cable stay to the top-right corner of the center door with a T-10 Torx screw.
f. Plug the two ribbon cables into the back of the OCP.
g. Fold the cables so they fit under the covers (see (page 181)).
h. Attach the metal cover over the ribbon cables with two T-15 Torx screws.
i. Attach the black protective cover to the back of the OCP with two T-10 Torx screws in
the bottom-left and top-right corners.
9. Close the center door and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise.
Faceplate on the base module 187

Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module
Part number 375823-0011 or 409866-001
Location Front of the tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion

module behind the center door and load port door
Characteristics Faceplate with load port door and door sensor cable
Function Contains the load port housing
Illustration
1

375823-001
• 1/8-inch Allen wrench
375823-001
library.
b. On the left side of the robotics unit, pull the retraction handle out of the opening and
away from the front of the library until you feel resistance.
d. Push the cover onto the robotics unit.
6. Remove center doors that are below and at the level of the faceplate, working from bottom
to top (see (page 181) and (page 183) as applicable).
7. Remove the load port door (see (page 178)).
8. Remove the load port magazine (see (page 221)).
9. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws securing the faceplate to the faceplates above and below
it.
10. Remove the four 1/8-inch Allen head screws on the left and right sides of the faceplate attached
to the cabinet.
11. Pull the faceplate away from the rack until the load port cable on the upper right is accessible.
12. Free the cable from the cable clamp and disconnect the cable connector.
13. Lift out the faceplate.
375823-001
1. Lift the faceplate up to near its final location and connect the load port cable connector at the
upper right (above the load port door) and place cable into cable clamp.
2. Fit the faceplate into its cabinet location.
3. Secure the frame using four 1/8-inch Allen head screws at the left and right sides.
4. Secure the frame at the top and bottom with four T-15 Torx screws.
5. Replace the load port door (see (page 178)).
6. Insert the load port magazine (see (page 221)).
7. Replace the center doors at and below the faceplate level, working from top to bottom (see
(page 181), and (page 183), as applicable).
8. Close load port doors and library doors.

409866-001
• 5/16in nutdriver
409866-001
NOTE: To remove a faceplate, you must slide all lower modules out of the library approximately
7.5 cm (3 inches).
library.
5. Working from bottom to top, remove the center doors from this module, all modules below
this module, and one module above this module (see (page 179), (page 181), and (page 183)
as applicable).
away from the front of the library until you feel resistance.
Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 189


d. Push the cover onto the robotics unit.
7. Remove the load port magazines from this module (see (page 221)).
8. Remove the load port doors or 4U blank covers from this module, all modules below this
module, and one module above this module (see (page 177), (page 178), and (page 219)).
9. If this module is not the bottom module in the library, unplug the interconnect cables from this
module and all modules below it.
a. At the rear of the library, loosen the thumbscrew in the cover over the interconnect cable
and remove the cover.
b. Push the ears of the connector to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver.
c. Pull the white tag to unplug the connector.
d. Tuck the cable inside the upper module so it doesn't get damaged.
10. If this module is not the bottom module in the library, remove the lift poles from all the modules
below this module.
a. Working from bottom to top, push down on the lift pole until the top of the pole disengages
from the top pole mount.
b. Lift up to remove the lift pole from the bottom pole mount.
11. If this module is the bottom module in the library, slide the floor out a short distance.
a. Remove the two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws. Use a T-15 screwdriver.
b. Pull the floor out of the front of the library approximately 7.5 cm (3 inches).
12. Remove the two center T-15 Torx screws that attach the faceplate to the faceplate above it.
Do this step on this module and all modules below it.
13. Remove the four side T-25 Torx screws that attach the module to the rack. Do this step on this
module and all modules below it.
WARNING! In the next step, be careful not to push the modules out farther than 7.5 cm (3
inches).
14. If this module is not the bottom module in the library, working from bottom to top, slide all
lower modules approximately 7.5 cm (3 inches) out of the front of the library. It is easiest to
push the modules out from the back of the library.

15. Remove the faceplate.
a. Remove the two black caps from the left side of this module with a flat-blade screwdriver.
b. Remove the four 5/16-inch nuts that attach the faceplate to the module. Remove the plastic
cap retainers from the left side.
c. Pull the faceplate off the studs and away from the front of the library until the load port
cable on the upper right is accessible.
d. Unplug the load-port-door cable (J111).
NOTE: If the card cage expansion module is above this module, you can remove the
6-slot array above the cable to make this step easier (see (page 223)).
e. Remove the faceplate completely.
409866-001
1. Install the faceplate.
a. Hold the faceplate up to the module close to its final position.
b. Plug in the load-port-door cable (J111) at the upper right above the load port door and
place the cable into the cable clamp, if necessary.
c. Install the faceplate in its final position over the protruding studs.
d. Attach the faceplate to the module with four 5/16-inch nuts. Use two plastic cap retainers
on the left side.
e. Snap the black caps over the cap retainers.
2. If you slid out any lower modules, reinstall them.
a. Working from top to bottom, push all modules fully into the rack.
b. Attach all modules to the rack with four side T-25 Torx screws.
c. Attach all faceplates to the faceplate above it with two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx
screws.
3. If you slid out the floor, reinsert it.
a. Slide the floor fully into the module.
b. Check that the tabs on the floor slide into the slots toward the back of the module.
c. Attach the floor to the module with two center 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws. Use a T-15
Torx screwdriver.
4. If you removed the lift poles, reinstall them.
a. Working from top to bottom, insert the lift pole onto the bottom pole mount.
b. Push down on the lift pole and insert the lift pole onto the top pole mount.
5. If you unplugged the interconnect cables, reconnect them.
a. At the back of the library, plug each interconnect cable into the module below it.
b. Replace the cover over the interconnect cable and tighten the thumbscrew.
6. Install all load port doors and 4U blank covers (see (page 177), (page 178), and (page 220)).
7. Insert the load port magazines in this module (see (page 221)). Close all load port doors.
8. Working from top to bottom, replace the center doors, (see (page 179), (page 181), and
Faceplate on a tape drive expansion module or capacity expansion module 191

Card cage assembly
Part number 375837-0011 or 409878-0012
Location In the card cage expansion module
Characteristics Slots for four interface controllers
Function Allows for four additional interface controller cards
Illustration
1
2
or AH062A.
Card cage assembly 375837-001

• Flat blade screwdriver
Removing the card cage assembly 375837-001

3. Open the front door by turning the knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Remove the lift pole:
NOTE: If the floor is installed at the bottom of the card cage expansion module you must
remove the left floor bracket and the bottom-left array to access the lift pole screw.
a. Reach inside the front of the library and remove the card cage bottom-left array to access
the lift pole screw.
b. Remove the T-25 Torx screw on the lift pole mount.
c. Remove the lift pole.
5. From the back of the library, remove all cabling to the cards installed while noting cable
locations for later reconnection.
6. Remove the interface controllers using a #1 Phillips screwdriver (see (page 145) or (page 147)).
7. Remove the secondary power supply or blank plate from the tape drive expansion module
above the card cage expansion module. Two T-15 Torx screws secure the power supply or
blank plate.
8. Reach inside the power supply compartment and unplug the interconnect ribbon cable by
pushing inward on the two tabs and then pulling on the cable handle.

9. Loosen the two captured slotted thumbscrews on the back of the card cage.
10. Turn the two cam-lock screws one-quarter turn counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver.
11. Remove the two side bracket T-15 Torx screws.
12. Pull the card cage out of the back of the library.
Replacing the card cage assembly 375837-001

1. Slide the card cage into the back of the library in the 4U slot.
NOTE: Make sure that the ribbon cable does not get pinched as you slide in the card cage.
2. Reach inside the power supply compartment and plug in the interconnect ribbon cable by
pushing the cable onto the connector.
3. Replace the two side bracket T-15 Torx screws.
4. Turn the two cam-lock screws one-quarter turn clockwise using a Phillips screwdriver.
5. Tighten the two captured slotted thumbscrews.
6. Replace the secondary power supply or blank plate on the tape drive expansion module above
the card cage expansion module. Two T-15 Torx screws secure the power supply or blank
plate.
7. Replace the interface cards.
8. Replace the card cabling.
9. Reach inside the front of the library, and replace the lift pole and lift pole mount with the T-25
Torx screw.
NOTE: If the floor is installed in the bottom of the card cage expansion module, replace the
bottom-left array and the left floor bracket.
10. Close the front door.

Card cage assembly 409878-001

• Short or right-angle T-15 Torx screwdriver
Removing the card cage assembly 409878-001

4. Unplug the power cables from the left side of the card cage expansion module.
5. Remove the interface controllers.
the interface controllers to make it easier to reconnect them later.
b. Unplug all cables from the interface controllers in the card cage expansion module.
c. Remove the interface controllers from the card cage expansion module (see (page 145)
or (page 147)).
Card cage assembly 193

6. Unplug the interconnect cable that connects the card cage expansion module to the module
above it.
a. Loosen the thumbscrew in the cover over the interconnect cable and remove the cover.
b. Push the tabs on the sides of the connector to the inside with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
c. Pull the white tag to unplug the cable.
d. Tuck the interconnect cable into the upper module so it doesn't get damaged.
• If the card cage expansion module is not the bottom module in the library, repeat the
previous step to unplug the bottom interconnect cable.
• If the card cage expansion module is the bottom module in the library, remove the cover
over the interconnect cable in the bottom-left corner.
8. Remove the fan assembly from the card cage expansion module (see (page 154), but you do
not need to remove the fans from the cover).
9. Remove the power supplies from the card cage expansion module (see (page 151)).
10. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the card cage assembly to the card cage
expansion module.
11. Pull the card cage assembly out of the card cage expansion module.
NOTE: The interconnect board, slot covers, and adapter plates are not part of the replacement
unit. You must remove them from the original card cage assembly and install them into the
new card cage assembly.
12. Remove the interconnect board from the card cage assembly.
a. From the hole in the top of the card cage assembly, unplug the cable from the interconnect
board.
b. Push the cable and connector inside the hole.
c. Turn the card cage assembly upside down.
d. Through the side opening, use a short or right-angle screwdriver to remove the three T-15
Torx screws that attach the interconnect board to the card cage assembly and remove
the board.
13. Write a note that shows the locations of the slot covers and adapter plates to make it easier
to reinstall them.
14. Remove all slot covers and adapter plates from the card cage assembly.
Replacing the card cage assembly 409878-001

1. Install all slot covers and card adapter plates into the card cage assembly (see the note that
you wrote).
2. Install the interconnect board into the card cage assembly.
a. Through the side opening, attach the interconnect board to the card cage assembly with
three T-15 Torx screws. Use a short or right-angle screwdriver.
b. Turn the card cage assembly right-side up.
c. Push the cable and connector out of the top hole.
d. Plug the cable into the interconnect board.
3. Slide the card cage assembly into the card cage expansion module.
4. Attach the card cage assembly to the card cage expansion module with two T-15 Torx screws.
5. Install the power supplies into the card cage expansion module (see (page 152)).
6. Install the fan assembly into the card cage expansion module (see (page 155)).

7. Plug in the interconnect cable that connects the card cage expansion module to the module
above it.
a. Pull the white tag to remove the interconnect cable from the upper module.
b. Plug the interconnect cable into the card cage expansion module.
c. Attach the cover over the interconnect cable with the thumbscrew.
• If the card cage expansion module is not the bottom module in the library, repeat the
previous step to plug in the bottom interconnect cable.
• If the card cage expansion module is the bottom module in the library, attach the cover
over the interconnect cable with the thumbscrew.
9. Install the interface controllers into the card cage expansion module (see (page 146) or
(page 148)).
10. Plug all cables into the interface controllers exactly as they were plugged in originally (see
the note that you wrote).
11. Plug the power cables into the left side of the card cage expansion module.
Backplane in the 8U base module

Part number 375834-0011 or 409875-001
Location Inside the base module midway between the front and rear
Characteristics Contains connectors and flash memory
Function Provides connections for cPCI cards, power supplies, tape drives,
fans, robotics unit, OCP, and load port sensors
Illustration
1
Backplane in the 8U base module 375834-001

Backplane in the 8U base module 195

Removing the backplane from the 8U base module 375834-001
NOTE: The 8U base backplane stores the settings for the library robotics controller and transfers
them to a new library robotics controller when installed. If you have to replace a library robotics
controller and the 8U base backplane together, open an escalation case with your regional level
2 storage team to engage level 3 engineering.
4. Remove the power supplies.
a. Unplug the power cord from each power supply in the base module.
b. Remove the two 6/32 x 1/4-inch Torx screws that attach each power supply to the library.
c. Pull the power supplies out of the library.
d. If the base module has only one power supply installed, remove the two screws that attach
the cover over the empty power supply compartment and remove the cover.
5. Remove the library robotics controller.
a. Remove all cabling to the library robotics controller, noting cable locations for later
reconnection.
b. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screw in the ejector handles at both
ends of the controller.
c. Push in the red tabs on the ejector handles, push the ejector handles toward the outside,
and then pull on them to remove the controller from the card cage.
6. Remove the Interface Manager card.
a. Remove all cabling to the Interface Manager card, noting cable locations for later
reconnection.
b. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws in the ejector handles at both
ends of the Interface Manager card.
c. Push the ejector handles to the outside, and then pull on them to remove the Interface
Manager card from the library.
7. Remove the existing interface controller.
a. Note the cable connections for easier reconnection to the replacement controller.
b. Carefully disconnect the FC and Ethernet cables from the interface controller by pressing
the connector tabs and removing the cables.
c. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws in the black ejector handles
at both ends of the interface controller.
d. Push the ejector handles to the outside, and then pull on them to remove the controller
from the library.
8. Remove the tape drives.
a. Disconnect the FC cable from the tape drives by pressing down on the cable connector
tab and pulling the connector away from the tape drive.
b. Remove the FC cable from the cable clip.
c. Using a slotted screwdriver, loosen the captive screw at the right side of each tape drive.
d. Grasp the tape drive and pull the tape drive from its bay.
9. Disconnect the fan cables from the base module backplane board.
a. Remove the cable access cover below the two fans by removing the six Torx screws.
b. Reach inside the cable access compartment and unplug the cable connectors (J112 and
J113) of both fans from the backplane board.
10. Disconnect the module interface cable from J114 at the bottom of the base module backplane
board.

11. Disconnect the OCP power and signal cables from the backplane board located at J108 and
J109 by reaching inside the cable access compartment below the two fans.
12. Disconnect the library main power switch connector from the backplane board located at
J136 by reaching inside the cable access compartment below the two fans.
13. Disengage the robotics unit from the backplane board by Performing one of the following:
• If your robotics unit looks like Figure 94 (page 197) (part number 375820-001), at the
front of the library, remove the robotics unit cover by pulling it toward you. Pull the
retraction handle on the left side of the robotics unit out of the opening and away from
the front of the library until you feel resistance. Push the retraction handle back into the
opening. Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the two screws on the front of the robotics unit
counterclockwise one-quarter turn. Insert your hand into the center cutout of the robotics
unit front panel, and then slide the robotics unit forward until its connector disengages
from the backplane board. Do not fully remove the robotics unit.
Figure 94 Identifying the robotics unit 375820-001
• If your robotics unit looks like Figure 95 (page 197) (part number 409863–001), at the
front of the library, remove the robotics unit cover by pulling it toward you. Pull the
retraction handle on the left side of the robotics unit out of the opening and away from
the front of the library until you feel resistance. Push the retraction handle back into the
opening. Push the latch on the door of the robotics unit to the right and open the door.
Push the latch on the right side of the robotics unit to the left and pull the robotics unit out
of the library a short distance. Do not fully remove the robotics unit.
Figure 95 Identifying the robotics unit 409863–001

14. Disconnect the base module load port door switch cable J110 and power cable ((page 198)):
a. Turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn counterclockwise and open the center door of
the library.
b. Reach inside the library and remove the rear column of arrays from the right side wall of
the base module to access the cables.
c. Disconnect the J110 cable and power cable from the backplane.
Figure 96 Remove arrays and cables from backplane
15. Inside the library, remove the two screws that attach the drive slots to the rear of base chassis
wall ((page 198)).
Figure 97 Drive slot screw locations
16. Remove the backplane, card cage and drive tower frame:
a. At the rear of the library, remove the two screws securing the vertical frame member
along the right side of the power supply slots.
b. Slide the power supply shelf forward and lift up to disengage the three mounting hooks,
and then remove the shelf.

Figure 98 Power supply shelf removal
c. A safety cover is installed over the power supply area. Loosen the two screws on the
safety cover until they disengage from the standoffs. Rotate the left side of the cover
toward you and carefully pull it out of the chassis.
NOTE: The card cage and the drive slot frame are attached to the backplane board.
d. Remove the ten screws that attach the backplane board to the rear of the chassis wall.
e. Carefully slide the backplane, card cage, and drive tower frame out of the base module.
f. Set the backplane and chassis on a table.
17. Loosen the screw on the right side of the adapter bracket until the bracket is no longer attached
to the card cage.
18. Slide the adapter bracket to the left until it disengages from the card mounting bracket on the
backplane.
19. Remove the six screws securing the card cage and drive tower frame to the backplane.
NOTE: Before removing the mounting bracket, note the relative position of the slotted
keyholes.
20. Remove the four screws that attach the card mounting bracket to the front of the backplane.
Replacing the backplane in the 8U base module 375834-001

1. Secure the card mounting bracket to the front of the backplane, using four screws.
2. Align the backplane holes with the holes on the back of the card cage and drive tower frame,
and then attach board with six screws.
3. Insert the knob on the adapter bracket into the keyhole slot on the card mounting bracket.
4. Slide the adapter bracket to the right until it is securely seated in the mounting bracket and
its screw aligns with the mounting hole on the card cage. Tighten the adapter bracket screw.
5. Replace the backplane, card cage and drive tower frame:
a. Carefully slide the chassis into the rear of the base module making sure that the bottom
of the drive tower frame slides into the slots in the base module chassis.
b. Secure the backplane to the rear of the chassis wall using the ten screws.
c. Replace the power supply safety cover and the two screws.
d. Install the power supply shelf by inserting the three mounting hooks into the punch-out
tabs.
e. Slide the shelf toward the backplane to securely seat it in the tabs.
f. Secure the vertical frame member along the left drive slot wall using two screws.

6. Replace the two screws that secure the drive slots to the rear of base chassis wall.
7. Connect the base module load port door switch cable J110:
a. Open the front door on the base module.
b. Reach inside the library and connect the J110 cable to the backplane.
c. Replace the rear column of arrays on the right side wall of the base module.
8. Connect the library main power switch connector to the backplane located at J136 by reaching
inside the cable access compartment below the two fans.
9. Connect the OCP power and signal cables to the backplane located at J108 and J109 by
reaching inside the cable access compartment below the two fans.
10. If a tape drive expansion module is installed below the base module, connect the module
interface cable to J114 at the bottom of the base module backplane.
11. Connect the fan cables to the base module backplane board:
a. Reach inside the cable access compartment and plug the fan cable connectors (J112 and
J113) onto the backplane.
b. Replace the cable access cover below the two fans with six T-15 Torx screws.
12. Replace the tape drives:
a. Insert the tape drive into the drive bay.
b. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive screw at the right side of each tape
drive.
c. Connect the FC cable to the tape drives.
13. Replace the interface controller:
a. Align the interface controller with the middle card slot (see (page 15)) and insert the card.
b. Push the ejector handles toward the inside to seat the card.
c. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws in the black ejector handles
at both ends of the interface controller.
d. Carefully connect the FC and Ethernet cables to the interface controller.
14. Replace the Interface Manager card.
a. Align the interface manager with the bottom card slot and insert the card.
b. Push the ejector handles to the inside to engage the card.
at both ends of the interface manager card.
d. Replace the cabling.
15. Replace the library robotics controller.
a. Align the library robotics controller with the top card slot and insert the card.
b. Push the ejector handles to the inside to engage the card.
at both ends of the card.
d. Replace the cabling.
16. Replace the power supply.
a. Insert the power supply into the chassis.
b. Replace the two Torx screws that attach the power supply to the chassis.
c. Plug the power cord into the power supply.
NOTE: If the base module has only one power supply, replace the blank plate and two
screws over the empty power supply slot.
17. Engage the robotics unit connector into the backplane by Performing one of the following:
• If your library looks like (page 197), at the front of the library, push the robotics unit into
the library. Using a Phillips screwdriver, turn the two screws on the front of the robotics

unit one-quarter turn to lock the robotics unit into place. Replace the robotics unit cover
by aligning the pins on the back of the robotics unit cover with the holes on the front of
the robotics unit. Press the cover into place.
• If your library looks like (page 197), at the front of the library, push the robotics unit into
the library until the connector engages. Close the door of the robot. Replace the robotics
unit cover by aligning the pins on the back of the robotics unit cover with the holes on
the front of the robotics unit. Press the cover into place.


library.
5. Remove the following components from the 8U base module.

• Tape drives (page 156)
• Power supplies (page 150)
• Library robotics controller (page 130)
• Interface Manager card (page 131)
• Interface controller (page 145) or (page 147)
• Slot covers
6. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws from the cover over the fan compartment and remove the
cover.
7. Inside the fan compartment, unplug the following cables:
• J112 Fan
• J113 Fan
• J108 OCP
• J109 OCP
• J136 Library main power switch

Figure 99 Unplugging cables from backplane
8. Inside the power supply compartment, unplug the interconnect cable from the bottom of the
backplane (J144).
Figure 100 Unplugging the interconnect cable
9. Disengage the robotics unit from the backplane.

away from the front of the library until you feel resistance. This step retracts the lift-flex
cable into the robotics unit.
d. Push the latch on the door of the robotics unit to the right and open the door.
e. Push the latch on the right side of the robotics unit to the left and pull the robotics unit out
of the library a short distance.
f. Put your fingers into the open door of the robotics unit and pull the robotics unit out of
the library a short distance. Do not completely remove the robotics unit.

10. Unplug the cables.
a. Inside the front of the library, remove the rear column of arrays from the right side wall
of the 8U base module (see (page 222) and (page 223)).
b. Unplug the load-port-door and power cables from the backplane board.
c. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the drive tower to the center wall (located
to the left of the drive bay opening).
11. Remove the backplane, card cage, and drive tower frame.
a. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the vertical frame member along the right
side of the power supply slots to the frame and remove it.
b. Slide the power supply shelf forward and lift it up to disengage the three mounting hooks
and remove the shelf.
c. Remove the two T-10 Torx screws that attach the safety cover over the backplane and
remove the safety cover.
Figure 101 Screws in the safety cover
d. Remove the remaining six T-15 Torx screws and two 1/4-inch hex standoffs that attach
the backplane to the center wall.
Figure 102 Screws and standoffs in the 8U-base-module backplane
e. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the top edge of the card cage to the base
module.

Figure 103 Screws in the top edge of base-module card cage
f. Carefully slide the backplane, card cage, and drive tower frame out of the back of the
library.

12. Remove the backplane from the card cage and drive frame tower.
a. The backplane has one or two adapter brackets installed. Loosen the Phillips screw on
the right side of each adapter bracket until the adapter bracket is no longer attached to
the card cage.
Figure 104 Screw in the adapter bracket
CAUTION: Do not twist or bend the adapter bracket while removing. This could damage
the bracket.
b. Slide each adapter bracket to the left until it disengages from the keyhole slot in the
mounting bracket on the backplane.
c. Remove the six T-15 Torx screws that attach the card cage and drive tower frame to the
backplane.
Figure 105 Screws in the card cage and drive tower frame
d. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the each mounting bracket to the front of
the backplane.
Figure 106 Screws in the mounting bracket

1. Attach the backplane to the card cage and drive frame tower.
a. Replace the two mounting brackets on the front of the backplane and attach with two
T-15 Torx screws.
b. Attach the card cage and drive tower frame to the backplane with six T-15 Torx screws.
CAUTION: Do not twist or bend the adapter bracket while installing. This could damage
the bracket.
c. Install the adapter brackets onto the mounting brackets on the backplane.
d. Tighten the Phillips screw on the right side of the adapter brackets.
2. Install the backplane, card cage, and drive tower frame.
a. Carefully slide the backplane, card cage, and drive tower frame into the back of the
library.
b. Attach the top edge of the card cage to the base module with two T-15 Torx screws.
c. Attach the backplane to the center wall with six T-15 Torx screws and two 1/4in hex
standoffs.
d. Attach the safety cover over the backplane with two T-10 Torx screws.
e. Install the power supply shelf into the slots on the walls.
f. Attach the vertical frame member along the right side of the power supplies to the frame
with two T-15 Torx screws.
3. Plug in the cables.
a. Inside the library, attach the drive tower to the center wall (located on the left side of the
drive bay opening) with two T-15 Torx screws.
b. Plug the load-port-door and power cables into the backplane.
c. Install the rear column of arrays on the right side wall of the 8U base module (see
(page 223) and (page 223)).
4. Engage the robotics unit.
a. Push the latch on the door of the robotics unit to the right and open the door.
b. Push the robotics unit fully into the library.
c. Make sure that the latch on the right side of the robotics unit is fully engaged. If it is not,
push the latch to the right. You should not be able to move the robotics unit.

d. Close the door of the robotics unit.
e. Make sure the robotics unit is properly installed (see (page 175)):
• The guide rail fits into the alignment slot.
• The tabs on the bottom of the door of the robotics unit are behind the faceplate.
• The latch on the door of the robotics unit is fully engaged and secure.
• The latch on the right side of the robotics unit is fully engaged and you cannot move
the robotics unit.
• The ratchet tool on the upper-right corner of the robotics unit is pushed in completely.
f. Push the cover onto the robotics unit.
5. Inside the fan compartment, plug in the following cables:
• J112 Fan, position the tab on the connector to the bottom
• J113 Fan, position the tab on the connector to the top
• J108 OCP power, position the tab on the connector to the right
• J109 OCP signal
• J136 Library main power switch, position the tab on the connector to the right
6. Inside the power supply compartment, plug the interconnect cable into the bottom of the
backplane (J144).
7. Attach the cover over the fan compartment with three T-15 Torx screws.
8. Install the following components into the 8U base module.
• Tape drives (page 157)
• Power supplies (page 151)
• Library robotics controller (page 130)
• Interface Manager card (page 133)
• Interface controller (page 146) or (page 148)
• Slot covers
to lock it.
Backplane in the 4U base module

Part number 375835-0011 or 409876-001
Location Inside the 4U base module behind the power supplies
Characteristics Two tape drive insertion connectors on right, and top and bottom
interface connectors
Function Provides connections to modules above and below and to tape

drives
Illustration

1


4. Remove the T-15 Torx screw securing the cover plate over the backplane board enclosure and
remove the cover plate.
5. Disconnect the interface cable at the top of the backplane board, and if there is an expansion
module below it, disconnect the interface cable at the bottom of the backplane board.
6. At the front of the library, turn the library door knob and open the library front door.
7. Remove the rear column of arrays from the right wall of the base module.
8. Disconnect the power connector that connects to the backplane board through the chassis
wall.
9. From the rear of the cabinet, remove the FC cables from the tape drives, loosen the captive
screw on the right side of each tape drive, and slide the tape drive assemblies out of the drive
slots.
10. Remove the five T-15 Torx screws securing the safety cover and backplane board to the chassis
wall, and slide the board and cover out of the drive tower opening.

1. Place the safety cover on the backplane board and slide it through the drive tower opening
to its location. Secure the board (with cover) to the chassis wall with five T-15 Torx screws.
2. Attach the interface cable at the top of the backplane board, and to the bottom, if applicable.
3. Secure the cover plate over the backplane enclosure using one T-15 Torx screw.
4. Insert the tape drive assemblies into the drive bays and tighten the captive screw on each with
a flat blade screwdriver.
5. Attach the FC cables from the interface controllers to the tape drives.
6. From the front of the library, connect the power connector to the backplane board through
the chassis wall.
7. Insert the column of arrays previously removed into the right wall of the base module.
8. Close the library front door.



library.
5. Unplug the power cable.

a. Inside the library, remove the rear array from the right wall of the 4U base module (see
(page 223)).
b. Unplug the power cable from the backplane on the center wall. Press the tabs on the top
and bottom of the connector to unlock it.
Figure 107 Location of the power cable
6. Remove the tape drives from the 4U base module.

a. Label the cables or write a note that shows the locations of the FC cables plugged into
the tape drives.
b. At the back of the library, unplug the FC cables from the two tape drives. Remove the FC
cables from the cable management features.
c. Loosen the thumbscrews in the two tape drives in the 4U base module.
d. Remove the tape drives.

7. Unplug the interconnect cables.
a. Loosen the two thumbscrews in the cover over the backplane compartment on the left side
of the 4U base module and remove the cover.
Figure 108 Removing the cover over the backplane compartment
b. Inside the backplane compartment, unplug the ribbon cables from the top and bottom of
the backplane. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the ears on the connectors to the
inside.
Figure 109 Unplugging the interconnect cables from the 4U-base-module backplane

8. Remove the backplane.
a. Remove the five T-15 Torx screws that attach the safety cover and backplane board to
the center wall.
Figure 110 Screws in the 4U-base-module backplane
b. Slide the board and safety cover to the right out of the drive tower opening.
TIP: The power connector on the back of the backplane is approximately 1.25 cm
(1/2 inches) tall. Move the board away from the center wall so the power connector
clears the hole in the wall.

1. Install the backplane.
a. Place the safety cover on the backplane board and slide it through the drive tower opening
to its location.
b. Attach the board and safety cover to the center wall with five T-15 Torx screws.
3. Plug the ribbon cables into the top and bottom of the backplane.
4. Attach the cover over the backplane compartment. Insert the tabs on the left and tighten the
two thumbscrews.
5. Install the tape drives.
a. Insert the two tape drives into the drive bays and tighten the captive screw on each.
b. Plug the FC cables into the tape drives exactly as they were before. Replace the FC cables
onto the cable management feature.
6. Plug in the power cable.
a. Inside the front of the library, plug the power cable into the backplane through the center
wall.
b. Insert the 6-slot array into the right wall of the 4U base module.
7. Close the center door and turn the center-door knob one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it.
Backplane in a tape drive expansion module

Part number 375836-0011 or 409877-001
Location Inside the tape drive expansion module behind the power supplies
Backplane in a tape drive expansion module 211

Characteristics Four tape drive insertion connectors on right, top and bottom
interface connectors, and two power supply connectors
Function Provides connections to modules above and below, to tape drives,

and to power supplies
Illustration
1
Required tools
Removing the backplane from a tape drive expansion module

5. Unplug the load-port-door cable.
a. Inside the library, remove the rear column of arrays from the right wall of the tape drive
expansion module.
b. Unplug the load-port-door cable that connects to the backplane through center wall.
Figure 111 Unplugging the load-port-door cable

6. Remove the power supplies and covers.
a. Unplug the power cords from the tape drive expansion module.
b. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws from the bracket that attaches the power supply to the
library and remove the power supplies.
c. If the library contains only one power supply, remove the two T-15 screws from the cover
over the power supply compartment. Disengage the tabs on the left side of the cover and
remove the cover.
Figure 112 Screws in the power-supply-compartment cover
7. Remove the tape drives.

a. Label the cables or write a note that shows the location of the FC cables plugged into the
tape drives.
b. At the rear of the library, remove the FC cables from the tape drives
c. Loosen the captive screw on the right side of each tape drive.
d. Slide the tape drive assemblies out of the drive bays.
8. Unplug the interconnect cables.
a. Disconnect the ribbon cable at the top of the backplane. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to
push the ears on the connector to the inside.
Figure 113 Unplugging the interconnect cables
b. If there is an expansion module below it, disconnect the ribbon cable at the bottom of
the backplane.
Backplane in a tape drive expansion module 213

9. Remove the backplane.
a. Remove the seven T-15 Torx screws that attach the safety cover to the backplane and
slide the cover out of the drive tower opening.
Figure 114 Screws in the safety cover
b. Remove the three remaining T-15 Torx screws that attach the backplane to the center wall
and slide the board out of the drive tower opening.
Figure 115 Screws in the tape-drive-expansion-module backplane
Replacing the backplane in a tape drive expansion module

1. Install the backplane.
a. Slide the backplane through the drive tower opening, and attach the backplane to the
chassis wall with three T-15 Torx screws.
b. Slide the safety cover through the drive tower opening and attach it to the backplane
with seven T-15 Torx screws.
a. Plug the ribbon cable into the top of the backplane.
b. If the library has a module below this one, plug the ribbon cable into the bottom of the
backplane.

3. Install the tape drives.
a. Insert the tape drive assemblies into the drive bays and tighten the captive screw on each
with a flat blade screwdriver.
b. Attach the FC cables from the interface controllers to the tape drives exactly as they were
plugged in before (see the labels on the cables or the note that you wrote).
4. Install the power supplies and covers.
a. Slide the power supplies into the library.
b. Attach the power supplies to the library with two 6/32 x 3/8-inch Torx screws. Use a
T-15 screwdriver.
c. Plug the power cords into the power supplies.
d. If the module contains only one power supply, install the cover over the power supply
compartment. Insert the two tabs on the left side of the cover and attach with two T-15
Torx screws.
5. Plug in the load-port-door cable.
a. Inside the front of the library, connect the load-port-door cable to the backplane through
the center wall.
b. Insert the column of arrays previously removed into the right wall of the tape drive
expansion module.
Interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage

expansion module
Location • Inside the tape drive expansion module above the power
supplies
• Inside the card cage expansion module above the power plugs
Characteristics Top and bottom interface connectors
Function Extends the interconnect cables from the backplane to the rear of
the library
Illustration
1
or AH062A.
Required tools
• Short or right-angle T-15 Torx screwdriver
Removing the interconnect board from a tape drive expansion module or card cage
expansion module
Interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage expansion module 215
5. Remove the power supply that is below the interconnect board (see (page 150)). Do not remove
the bracket.
6. Loosen the thumbscrew in the cover over the interconnect cable and remove the cover.
7. Unplug the cable from the interconnect board. Push the tabs on the connector to the inside to
unlock it. Pull the white tag to unplug the cable.
8. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws that are holding the interconnect board to the top of the
compartment.
Figure 116 Screws in the interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage
expansion module
9. Unplug the remaining cable from the interconnect board. Push the tabs on the connector to
the inside to unlock it.
Replacing the interconnect board in a tape drive expansion module or card cage
expansion module
1. Plug the ribbon cable that is inside the power supply compartment into the interconnect board
(J114Y).
2. Attach the interconnect board to the top of the power supply compartment with three T-15
Torx screws.
3. Plug the interconnect cable from the upper module into this module.
4. Attach the cover over the interconnect cable with the thumbscrew.
5. Install the power supply (see (page 151)).
Interconnect board in a capacity expansion module

Location Inside the rear of the capacity expansion module in the top-left
corner
Characteristics Top and bottom interface connectors and load-port-door cable

connector

Function Enables the connection between the capacity expansion module
and other modules
Illustration
Required tools
Removing the interconnect board from a capacity expansion module

4. Unplug the interconnect cables that connect the capacity expansion module to the modules
above and below it.
a. At the back of the library, loosen the thumbscrew in the cover over the interconnect cable
in the top-left corner of the capacity expansion module.
b. Push the ears of the connector to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver.
c. Pull the white tag to unplug the connector.
d. Tuck the cable inside the upper module so it doesn't get damaged.
e. If you have a module installed below the capacity expansion module, repeat this step for
the bottom interconnect cable in the bottom-left corner of the capacity expansion module.
5. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that attach the interconnect board to the capacity expansion
module.
Figure 117 Screws in the interconnect board in a capacity expansion module
6. Partially remove the interconnect board from the capacity expansion module and unplug the
load-port-door cable from the interconnect board.
7. Remove the interconnect board and attached ribbon cable fully from the capacity expansion
module.
8. Unplug the ribbon cable from the bottom of the interconnect board.
Interconnect board in a capacity expansion module 217

Replacing the interconnect board in a capacity expansion module
1. Plug the ribbon cable into the bottom of the interconnect board (J114B). On the ribbon cable,
use the connector that does not have the white tag.
2. Insert the interconnect board into the capacity expansion module. Thread the ribbon cable
down through the compartment.
3. Plug the load-port-door cable into the interconnect board. Position the tab on the connector
to the right.
4. Insert the interconnect board fully into the compartment.
5. Attach the interconnect board to the capacity expansion module with two T-15 Torx screws.
6. Plug in the interconnect cables that connect the capacity expansion module to the modules
above and below it.
7. Attach the covers over the interconnect cables and tighten the thumbscrews.
Robotics unit cover

Part number 375832-0011 or 409873–001
Location On the front of the robotics unit
Characteristics Cover with four pins on back that engage front of robotics unit
Function Front panel for the robotics unit
Illustration
1
Removing the robotics unit cover

1. Grasp the robotics unit cover at both sides.

2. Pull off the robotics unit cover (see (page 219)).
Figure 118 Removing the robotics unit cover
Replacing the robotics unit cover

1. Align the pins on the back of the cover of the robotics unit with the holes on the front of the
robotics unit.
2. Push the cover onto the robotics unit. As the pins engage, the cover snaps into place.
4U blank cover
Part number 375831-0011 or 409872-001
Location On the right side of the 4U base module and card cage expansion
module
Characteristics Blank cover with four tabs on back
Function Aesthetics
Illustration
1
Removing a 4U blank cover

The 4U blank cover has two square tabs on the top and two triangular tabs on the bottom.
1. Push down on the 4U blank cover, and pull the top of the 4U blank cover away from the front
of the library to release the top tabs from the slots.
4U blank cover 219

2. Lift up to release the bottom tabs and pull the cover out.
Figure 119 Removing the 4U blank cover
Replacing a 4U blank cover

1. Insert the triangular tabs on the bottom of the 4U blank cover into the slots on the blank area
of the front faceplate.
2. While pushing down, push the top of the 4U blank cover toward the library and snap the top
tabs into the slots.

Load port magazine
Location Inside the load port door on the right side of the base module, tape
drive expansion module, and capacity expansion module
Characteristics One column, five slots
Function Holding tape cartridges for placement into library
Illustration
Removing a load port magazine

1. On the OCP, select the Operations→Unlock Load Ports command. All load port doors open.
2. Fully open the load port door.
3. Grab the handle and pull the magazine out of the load port along its track to remove it from
the library.
CAUTION: Guard plates prevent access to the inside of the library when a load port
magazine is removed. These doors will move back out of the way when a magazine is
reinserted. You should not attempt to otherwise move these guards, nor gain access to the
library through the load ports.
Replacing a load port magazine

1. Align the magazine with the top and bottom track on the load port door, and slide the
magazine through the spring door and fully into the load port.
Load port magazine 221

3. After all load port doors are closed, the library does an inventory of the load ports.
Figure 120 Inserting a magazine into the load port
Three-slot arrays
Location On the walls inside the library
Characteristics One column, three slots
Function Holds tape cartridges for library storage
Illustration
Removing a three-slot array

1. Write down the barcode number and location of all the tape cartridges in the array that you
are removing.
2. Remove the tape cartridges from the array.

3. Push the release lever on the array and pull up on the array to lift it out of the slots on the
walls of the library.
Figure 121 Release lever on the three-slot array
Replacing a three-slot array

1. Insert the array into the slots on the wall of the library ((page 223)).
2. Pull down on the array to snap it into place.
3. Insert the tape cartridges in the same slots as they were in originally.
Figure 122 Inserting a three-slot array
Six-slot arrays
Location On the walls inside the library
Characteristics One column, six slots
Six-slot arrays 223

Function Holds tape cartridges for library storage
Illustration
To remove or replace a six-slot array, follow the steps in (page 222).
Figure 123 Release lever on six-slot array

Figure 124 Inserting a six-slot array
Six-slot arrays 225

5 Support and other resources
• “Contacting HP” (page 226)
• “Related information” (page 226)
• Document conventions and symbols
• “Rack stability” (page 228)
Contacting HP
Go to www.hp.com/support/cvtl for the latest troubleshooting information, firmware updates,
software versions, and documentation.
Before contacting HP, collect the following information:
• Product model names and numbers
• Technical support registration number (if applicable)
• Product serial numbers
• Error messages
• Operating system type and revision level
• Detailed questions
For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website:
http://www.hp.com/support
Related information
The following sections present related information, including:
• Related documentation
• HP web sites
Related documentation
The following documents and websites provide related information:
• ESL E-Series Interface Manager poster
• ESL9000 Series Interface Manager Replacement Instructions poster
• EML E-Series Interface Manager replacement poster
• HP Command View TL SMI-S Provider installation instructions
• HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library User Guide
You can find these documents from the Manuals page of the HP Business Support Center website:
http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
In the Storage section, click Storage Software or Tape Storage and Media and then select your
product.
HP websites
For additional information, see the following HP websites:
• http://www.hp.com
• http://www.hp.com/go/storage
• http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
• http://www.hp.com/support/downloads
• http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure
HP tape cartridges
To make sure you get the best performance from your tape library, always use HP branded tape
cartridges. HP develops, tests, and qualifies their hardware and tape cartridges together to ensure
compatibility, and enabling you to keep your data safe. To learn more about HP tape cartridges
or to order online, go to the HP website:
www.hp.com/go/storagemedia
Product warranties
For information about product warranties, see the warranty information website:
http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty
Subscription services
HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber's Choice for Business website:
http://www.hp.com/go/e-updates
After registering, you will receive e-mail notification of product enhancements, new driver versions,
firmware updates, and other product resources.
Typographic conventions
Table 48 Document conventions
Convention Element
Blue text: Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses

Table 48 (page
227)
Blue, underlined Website addresses

text: http://
www.hp.com
Bold text • Keys that are pressed

• Text entered into a GUI element, such as a box
• GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu
and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Italic text Text emphasis
Monospace text • File and directory names

• System output
• Code
• Commands, their arguments, and argument values
Monospace, • Code variables

italic text
• Command variables
Monospace, Emphasized monospace text

bold text
WARNING! Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.
CAUTION: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
Typographic conventions 227

IMPORTANT: Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.
NOTE: Provides additional information.
TIP: Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.
Rack stability
Rack stability protects personnel and equipment.
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:

• Extend leveling jacks to the floor.
• Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
• In multiple-rack installations, fasten racks together securely.

A Specifications and characteristics
Library component specifications
Table 49 Library component specifications
Characteristic Specification
10642 rack with 1 PDU
Physical:
Weight 114.84 kg (253 lb)
Dimensions (HxDxW) 199.9 x 100.8 x 61.0 cm (78.7 x 39.7 x 24 in)
Electrical:
AC voltage range 200–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Load capacity 3680 VA (@ 230 VAC)
Base module (12U) with 1 power supply, 2 tape drives, and robot (base module consists of base unit
(8U) and tape drive expansion module (4U)
Physical:
Weight, base module 45 kg (98 lb)
Weight, tape drive expansion module 20.5 kg (44.8 lb)
Dimensions (HxDxW), base module 35.6 x 81.1 x 48.0 cm (14.0 x 31.9 x 18.9 in)
Dimensions (HxDxW), tape drive expansion 17.8 x 81.1 x 48.0 cm (7.0 x 31.9 x 18.9 in)
module
Electrical:
Power rating 2 A (at 200 VAC) combined max peak
Card cage expansion module (4U)
Physical:
Weight (with 1 power supply and 3 interface 20 kg (43.8 lb)

controllers)
Dimensions (HxDxW) 17.8 x 76.3 x 48.0 cm (7.0 x 30.0 x 18.9 in)
Electrical:
Power rating 1.25 A (at 200 VAC)
Tape drive expansion module (8U) with 1 power supply and 4 tape drives
Physical:
Weight 41 kg (90.0 lb)
Electrical:
Input power 288 Watts
Power rating 297 VA
Input current 1.5 A (at 200 VAC)
Capacity expansion module (8U)
Physical:
Library component specifications 229

Table 49 Library component specifications (continued)
Characteristic Specification
Weight 20.1 kg (44.2 lb)
Electrical
Power rating 0.8 A (at 240 VAC)
Main power supply
Card cage expansion module power supply
LTO Ultrium tape drive and tray
LTO Ultrium cartridge
Weight 220 g (7.8 oz)
Dimensions 6U wide x 4HP tall
Power requirements 3.3 VDC, 1.5 A typ., 4.95 W, 2.85 A for 4 ms5.0
VDC, 2.7 A typ., 13.50 W, 3.2 A for 0.7 secTotal
power=18.45 W
Power requirements 3.3 VDC +/- 100 mV; 7.5 A peak operating current;
25 W peak operating power5.0 VDC +/- 100 mV; 5
A peak operating current; 25 W operating power
Power requirements 3.3 VDC, 0.65 A typ., 2.14 W, 2.0 A5.0 VDC, 0.8
A typ., 4.0 W, 2.0 A Total power=6.14 W
Library environmental specifications

Table 50 Library environmental specifications
Item Measurements
Operating Storage Transporting
Temperature +10 to +35°C (+50 to +10 to +40°C (+50 to -40 to +60°C (-40 to
+95°F) +104°F) +140°F)
Humidity 20 to 80% 10 to 95% 10 to 95%
Wet bulb (maximum, +29.2°C (+84.5°F) +35°C (+95°F) +35°C (+95°F)

noncondensing)
Altitude 76 to 4,500 m (-250 to 15,000 ft)
230 Specifications and characteristics

Acoustics
Table 51 Acoustics
Item Operating Idle
Sound power 7.5 Bels (A) 7.5 Bels (A)
Sound pressure Bystander 7.5 Bels (A) (60 dB) 7.5 Bels (A)
position
Ultrium tape drive comparisons

Table 52 Ultrium tape drive comparisons
Characteristic Ultrium 460 Ultrium 960 Ultrium 1840 Ultrium 3280
Capacity 200 GB 400 GB 800 GB 1.5 TB

(native)
Transfer rate Up to 30 MB/sec1 Up to 80 MB/sec1 Up to 120 MB/sec1 140 MB/sec1

(native)
Data rate 10-30 MB/sec 27-80 MB/sec 40-120 MB/sec 47-140 MB/sec
matching
Host interfaces 2 Gb/sec FC 2 Gb/sec FC 4 Gb/sec FC 8 Gb/secFC
Head channels 8 16 16 16
Bit density 7.40 Kb/mm (188 9.64 Kb/mm (244.9 13.52 Kb/mm (343.4 13.52 Kb/mm (343.4
Kb/inch) Kb/inch) Kb/in) Kb/in)
Number of 512 704 896 896

tracks
Length 609 m 680 m 820 m 820 m
WORM support No Yes Yes Yes
Compatibility
Write Ultrium Gen. 1, 2 Ultrium Gen. 2, 3 Ultrium Gen. 3, 4 Ultrium Gen. 4, 5
Read Ultrium Gen. 1, 2 Ultrium Gen. 1, 2, 3 Ultrium Gen. 2, 3, 4 Ultrium Gen. 3, 4, 5

1
HP classifies the performance of the Ultrium drives as 1000 x 1000 bytes per second (that is, in base 10) in common
with most other disk and tape drive vendors. Most applications, however, measure performance as 1024 x 1024 bytes
per second.
Acoustics 231
B Codes
This appendix lists codes you might encounter in log events or error messages.
Operation state codes

(page 232) lists operation state codes.
Table 53 Operation state codes
Operation state ID Description
0000 OK
0001 Invalid request received by device
0201 An error was returned from the snmp agent
0501 Robot cannot move on rail
0502 Robot cannot find required target
0503 Robot cannot complete reach operation
0504 Robot cartridge stuck in source location
0505 Robot source location is empty
0506 Robot reach not safe
0507 Robot label miscompare
0508 Robot target location unusable
0509 Robot cannot move Wrist or Z
0510 Robot destination full or obstructed
0511 Robot vision system inoperative
0512 Robot init failed - not operative
0513 Robot hit obstruction on rail
0514 Robot needs to be reset
0515 Robot hand is empty when requested to put
0516 Robot hand is full when requested to get
0601 The drive still has a cartridge loaded
0602 The drive is empty
0603 The drive has a cartridge present
0604 The drive is not functional
0605 The drive has a bad cartridge
0606 The drive does not support readOnly functionality
0607 The drive had a mis-buckle error. Load retry not

recommended.
0608 The load failed because the cleaning cartridge is expired
0701 Cannot Move
0702 Move failed, OK to try again
232 Codes
Table 53 Operation state codes (continued)
Operation state ID Description
0703 Safety door switch sensor failure expected state not

detected
0901 Passthrough Port failed-PTP determined to be not operative
0902 Passthrough Port failed a Move Retry is possible
0903 Passthrough Port failed Door Open Detected, Amps are

disabled
1000 Scsi is ok
1001 Scsi encountered ods errors
1002 Scsi does not recognize transport type
1003 Scsi detected multiple cards of different transport types
1004 Scsi port configuration attempt failed
1005 Scsi operating system call failed
1006 Scsi could not find valid port configuration data
1007 Scsi failed a command action; perform lun reset and try
again
1008 Scsi failed a port action; port is disabled
1009 Scsi detected no usable host interface
1010 Scsi program in an undesirable state
1011 Scsi encountered library interface errors
3200 Ifm is ok
3201 Ifm is not ready to process commands
3202 Ifm is currently in or is transitioning to an inoperational

state
Activity codes
(page 233) lists the library activity codes.
Table 54 Activity codes
Activity ID Description
0000 No action
0100 Application start
0101 Application shutdown
0102 Application task start
0103 Application task exit
0200 Set log criteria in device
0201 Get log criteria from device
0202 Event listener registered with device
0203 Firmware download
0204 File download
Activity codes 233

Table 54 Activity codes (continued)
0205 File upload
0206 Get version information
0400 Configuration download
0401 Get library number from device
0402 Set library number in device
0403 Get local date & time
0404 Set local date & time
1000 HLI mount
1001 HLI dismount
1002 HLI swap
1003 HLI move
1004 HLI CAP reserve
1005 HLI CAP release
1006 HLI CAP enter
1007 HLI CAP eject
1008 HLI CAP lock
1009 HLI CAP unlock
1010 HLI CAP status query
1011 HLI catalog
1012 HLI LMU status query
1013 HLI transport status query by panel
1014 HLI LMU serial number query
1015 HLI LSM serial number query
1100 FC/SCSI Inquiry
1101 FC/SCSI test unit ready
1102 FC/SCSI mode sense
1103 FC/SCSI mode select
1104 FC/SCSI move medium
1105 FC/SCSI init element status
1106 FC/SCSI init element status with range
1107 FC/SCSI log sense
1108 FC/SCSI persistent reserve in
1109 FC/SCSI persistent reserve out
1110 FC/SCSI position to element
1111 FC/SCSI prevent/allow medium removal
1112 FC/SCSI release
234 Codes
1113 FC/SCSI request sense
1114 FC/SCSI request volume element address
1115 FC/SCSI send diagnostic
1116 FC/SCSI send volume tag
1117 FC/SCSI test unit ready
1118 FC/SCSI write buffer
1200 Initializing scsi interface
1201 Activating scsi port
1202 Processing command event
1203 Processing task management event
1204 Processing ioctl status event
1205 Processing config change event
1206 Shutting down scsi interface
1207 Processing command in device server
1208 Processing event
3000 Cartridge move
3001 Get Drive Configuration
3002 Get Drive Time Of Day
3003 Get Drive Information
3004 Drive Initialization
3005 Load Drive
3006 Park Drive
3007 Prepare To Load Drive
3008 Reset Drive
3009 Reset Drive Fast Load
3010 Reset Drive Holdoff Load
3011 Rewind Unload Drive
3012 Set Drive Configuration
3013 Set Drive Fast Load
3014 Set Drive Holdoff Load
3015 Set Drive Time Of Day
3016 Get Drive State
3017 Drive cleaning
5000 Robot device announce
5001 Robot state query
5002 Robot initialize
Activity codes 235

5003 Robot audit
5004 Robot fetch cartridge
5005 Robot put cartridge
5006 Robot move to position
5007 Robot move until stall
5008 Robot move and push
5009 Robot prepare for push
5010 Robot get statistics
5011 Robot set statistics
5300 Robot state change
6000 Drive device announce
6001 Drive state query
6002 Drive control power
6003 Drive request to put
6004 Drive put complete
6005 Drive load
6006 Drive rewind & unload
6007 Drive request to fetch
6008 Drive fetch complete
6009 Drive get statistics
6010 Drive set statistics
6300 Drive state change
6500 Drive controller announce
9000 PTP device announce
9001 PTP state query
9002 PTP initialize
9003 PTP move home
9004 PTP move away
9005 PTP disable servos
9006 PTP get statistics
9007 PTP set statistics
9300 PTP state change
236 Codes
C Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking
For important safety, environmental, and regulatory information, see Safety and Compliance
Information for Server, Storage, Power, Networking, and Rack Products, available at http://
www.hp.com/support/Safety-Compliance-EnterpriseProducts.
Abstract
This module provides the EAC logo for Belarus, Kazakhstan, and Russia.
Manufacturer and Local Representative Information

Manufacturer’s information:
• Hewlett-Packard Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S.
Local Representative information Russian:
• HP Russia: ЗАО “Хьюлетт-Паккард А.О.”, 125171, Россия, г. Москва, Ленинградское
шоссе, 16А, стр.3, тел/факс: +7 (495) 797 35 00, +7 (495) 287 89 05
• HP Belarus: ИООО «Хьюлетт-Паккард Бел», 220030, Беларусь, г. Минск, ул.
Интернациональная, 36-1, офис 722-723, тел.: +375 (17) 392 28 18, факс: +375 (17)
392 28 21
• HP Kazakhstan: ТОО «Хьюлетт-Паккард (К), 050040, Казахстан, г. Алматы, Бостандыкский
район, ул. Тимирязева, 28В, 1 этаж, тел./факс: +7 (727) 355 35 50, +7 (727) 355 35
51
Local Representative information Kazakh:
• HP Kazakhstan: ЖШС «Хьюлетт-Паккард (К)», Қазақстан, Алматы қ., Бостандық ауданы,
Тимирязев к-сі, 28В, тел./факс: +7 (727) 355 35 50, +7 (727) 355 35 51
Manufacturing date:
The manufacturing date is defined by the serial number.
CCSYWWZZZZ (HP serial number format for this product)
Valid date formats include:
• YWW, where Y indicates the year counting from within each new decade, with 2000 as the
starting point; for example, 238: 2 for 2002 and 38 for the week of September 9. In addition,
2010 is indicated by 0, 2011 by 1, 2012 by 2, 2013 by 3, and so forth.
• YYWW, where YY indicates the year, using a base year of 2000; for example, 0238: 02
for 2002 and 38 for the week of September 9.
Turkey RoHS material content declaration

Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Ukraine RoHS material content declaration

Обладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деяких
небезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановою
Кабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 № 1057
Warranty information
HP ProLiant and X86 Servers and Options
http://www.hp.com/support/ProLiantServers-Warranties
Turkey RoHS material content declaration 237

HP Enterprise Servers
http://www.hp.com/support/EnterpriseServers-Warranties
HP Storage Products
http://www.hp.com/support/Storage-Warranties
HP Networking Products
http://www.hp.com/support/Networking-Warranties
238 Belarus Kazakhstan Russia marking

D Ordering HP tape cartridges and barcode label packs
Where to buy tape cartridges and barcode labels
HP recommends using HP tape cartridges in your HP StorageWorks tape library. These can be
purchased directly from HP, or through an authorized reseller or sales office.
• For the location of an HP authorized reseller:
◦ Call 1-800-345-1518 (U.S. only).
◦ Call 1-800-263-5868 (Canada only).
◦ Outside of North America, see the HP web site for locations and telephone numbers:
http://www.hp.com/support.
• To order through HP:
◦ Call 1-800-538-8787 (North America only).
◦ Visit us online at http://www.hp.com/go/storagemedia.
Part numbers for tape cartridges and barcode labels

Table 55 HP tape cartridges and barcode labels
Tape drive type/product HP part number
Ultrium 460
Data cartridge C7972A (400 GB)1
Prelabeled data cartridge C7972AL (400 GB1—Europe, Americas only)
Universal cleaning cartridge C7978A
Barcode label pack (100 data labels, 10 cleaning Q2002A

labels)
Ultrium 960
Data cartridge, read/write C7973A (800 GB1)
Data cartridge, WORM (write once, read many) C7973W (800 GB1)
Prelabeled data cartridges, read/write, 20 pack C7973AL (800 GB1—Europe, Americas only)
Prelabeled data cartridges, WORM, 20 pack C7973WL (800 GB1—Europe, Americas only)
Universal cleaning cartridge C7978A
Barcode label pack, read/write (100 data labels, 10 Q2007A

cleaning labels)
Barcode label pack, WORM (100 data labels, 10 Q2008A

cleaning labels)
Ultrium 1840
Data cartridge, read/write C7974A (1.6 TB1)
Data cartridge, WORM (write once, read many) C7974W (1.6 TB1)
Non-custom prelabeled data cartridges, read/write, C7974AN (1.6 TB1—Europe, Americas only)
20 pack
Custom prelabeled data cartridges, read/write, C7974AL (1.6 TB1—Europe, Americas only)
20 pack
Where to buy tape cartridges and barcode labels 239

Table 55 HP tape cartridges and barcode labels (continued)
Tape drive type/product HP part number
Custom prelabeled data cartridges, WORM, 20 pack C7974WL (1.6 TB1—Europe, Americas only)

cleaning labels)

cleaning labels)
Ultrium 3280
Data cartridge, read/write C7975A (3.0 TB1)
Data cartridge, WORM (write once, read many) C7975AL (3.0 TB1, Europe, Americas only)
Non-custom prelabeled data cartridges, read/write, C7975W (3.0 TB1)

20 pack
Custom prelabeled data cartridges, read/write, C7975WL (3.0 TB1, Europe, Americas only)
20 pack
Custom prelabeled data cartridges, WORM, 20 pack C7978A

cleaning labels)

cleaning labels)
1
Capacity values assume a 2:1 compression ratio
240 Ordering HP tape cartridges and barcode label packs

E Installing a redundant PDU
PDU components
The library comes with one PDU installed. For a variety of reasons, it may be desirable or necessary
to add a second PDU to the library rack. The factors that determine when to add a second PDU
are described below.
The main PDU components are:
• High voltage modular PDU, 200–240 VAC, 16 amp, part number 252663-B24 (kit includes
two power strips and mounting hardware)
• Main power cord, L6-20P 20 amp, 220 V, twist lock, part number 340653-001
• Power cords (PDU to library), 1/2 meter, part number 142257-B28
Leakage current
The most overriding reason to add a second PDU to the rack is to meet safety requirements for
leakage current. Regulations limit the amount of leakage current per power outlet to 3.5 mA. This
is the amount of current that may be returned through the ground line to the wall outlet, and therefore
is the amount of leakage current allowed per PDU.
The individual power supplies of the library may each contribute a maximum of 0.5 mA. This
means no more than seven of the library power supplies may be attached to a single PDU. A fully
configured library, with redundant power supplies, would necessitate 10 power supplies. In that
configuration, a second PDU is certainly required. Even a 32U-high configuration of the library
with redundant power supplies would require a second PDU. Even if redundant power supplies
are not currently installed, you should consider adding a second PDU when the library is expanded
above 24U in height. With a second PDU installed, upgrading to redundant power supplies in the
future is simplified by being able to just slide them into place and connect them to the power strip.
If equipment is added to the library rack from other sources, it is your responsibility to determine
the maximum leakage current from all the equipment using the PDU so that the 3.5 mA limit on a
single PDU is not exceeded.
Redundancy
Another important reason to add a second PDU to the library rack is to add another layer of power
redundancy to the product. As redundant power supplies are added to library modules, the system
can be made even more fail-safe by powering individual power supplies, one from each module,
with separate AC power circuits. This requires a second PDU.
Every library module level (for example, the base module, card cage expansion module, tape
drive expansion module, and so on) can have redundant power supplies added as an option.
Each module level, with each power supply powered from different AC circuits, ensures continued
library operation should one of the AC power outlets fail. The location of the power strips for the
second PDU are installed in a manner such that the power cords of the redundant power supplies
of each module level can easily reach the PDU.
Power rating
As was the case with leakage current, if equipment is added to the library rack from other sources,
it is your responsibility to make sure the power rating of the PDU and power cords are not exceeded
by the load of this additional equipment. The power rating of the PDU is sufficient to power up to
seven power supplies in the library that are allowed by the leakage current specification. You must
check the power ratings of any additional equipment added to the rack, the power rating of the
PDU, and the power rating of the power cords, to make sure all are within specified limits.
PDU components 241

Placement of redundant PDU components
The library primary PDU (#1) and two power strips (#1 and #3) are installed at the factory. The
redundant PDU (#2) is installed above the primary PDU, also in a 0U side mount position. The top
of PDU #1 is approximately 33 cm (13 inches) from the caster boss. The top of PDU #2 is placed
approximately 63 cm (25 inches) from the caster boss (see (page 242)).
Power strip #2 is placed equidistant between power strips #1 and #3.
Power strip #4 is placed in a position low in the rack so that it does not interfere with the power
cords coming from PDU #1 to power strips #1 and #3.
With properly placed power strips in a fully redundant 40U configuration, the top six power supply
cords go to power strips #1 and #2. One power cord at each redundant level goes to each power
strip.
Similarly, the bottom four power cords in a fully redundant configuration are divided between
power strips #3 and #4. By using 0.5-m (15-inch) power cords, the dressing should be minimal.
Figure 125 Redundant PDU and power strip placement
1. Power strip #2 2. Redundant PDU (#2)

3. Power strip #4 4. Caster boss
Installation of redundant PDU components

Refer to the instructions provided with your redundant PDU for installation steps. After installation,
dress all cords with cable ties. In addition, use cable ties to lock the power cords coming out of
the PDU that go to each power strip.
242 Installing a redundant PDU

Glossary
array (1) A section of vertical or horizontal tape cartridge receptacles inside a library.
(2) A molded unit that holds multiple cartridges.
backplane The storage system electronic printed circuit board into which storage system devices can be
plugged.
barcode reader A component of the robot that is used for tape cartridge identification and position calibration.
base module The 12U module in every HP Enterprise Modular Library E-Series that contains the robot, tape
drives, and card cage for controller cards. For slot numbering purposes, the base module is
divided into a base unit (8U) and tape drive expansion module (4U).
card Also called printed wire assembly or printed circuit board.
cartridge The plastic housing around a cartridge tape. A plastic leader block is attached to the tape for
automatic threading when loaded in transport. The spine of the cartridge contains a label listing
the volume identification number.
cartridge array See array..
center door A door on the center-front of a library through which service personnel or operators can access
the interior of the library.
Class A digital Class A equipment is intended for commercial installation.
device
Class I laser Class 1 lasers are products where the power of the laser beam produced (the accessible emission)
product is always below the Maximum Permissible Exposure value. Therefore, for Class 1 lasers the output
power is below the level at which it is believed eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of
a Class 1 laser will not result in eye injury. Class 1 lasers may therefore be considered eye safe.
Class II laser Class 2 lasers are limited to a maximum output power of 1 mW. A person receiving an eye
product exposure from a Class 2 laser, either accidentally or as a result of someone else's deliberate
action (misuse) will be protected from injury by their natural blink reflex. This is a natural involuntary
response which causes the individual to blink and avert their head thereby terminating the eye
exposure.
cleaning cartridge A tape cartridge that contains special material to clean the tape path in a transport or tape drive.
LTO cleaning cartridges labels have CLN prefixes.
CLI Command Line Interface
CompactPCI (cPCI) Industry standard bus used for card-to-card bus expansion.
containment box A box in the HP Enterprise Modular Library robot that holds the lift-flex cable. The cable retracts
into the box as the table is raised.
data cartridge A term used to distinguish a cartridge onto which a tape drive may write data from a cartridge
used for cleaning purposes.
drive The device that the library uses to record data onto tapes. Also called tape drive.
drive cleaning A library feature that uses a cleaning cartridge to clean a tape drive.
drive module The entire assembly that houses the tape drive, including the metal housing and connectors.
ESD Electrostatic discharge. The release of static electricity from one conductor to another.
Ethernet A local-area, packet-switched network technology. Originally designed for coaxial cable, it is
now found running over shielded, twisted-pair cable. Ethernet is a 10- or
100-megabytes-per-second LAN.
event A significant library occurrence (such as tape drive errors, online/offline transition, tape drive
cleanings, and other information) that is listed in an automated log.
export The action in which the library places a tape cartridge into the load port so that the operator can
remove the cartridge from the library.
Fibre Channel A bidirectional, full-duplex, point-to-point, serial data channel structured for high performance
capacity. The Fibre Channel is an interconnection of multiple communication ports, called N_Ports.
These N_Ports are interconnected by a switching network, called a fabric, to a point-to-point link,
243
or an arbitrated loop. Fibre Channel is a generalized transport mechanism with no protocol of
its own. A Fibre Channel does not have a native input/output command set, but can transport
existing Upper Level Protocols (ULP) such as SCSI. Fibre Channel operates at speeds of 200 MB
per second. Fibre Channel operates over distances of up to 100 m over copper media or up to
10 km over optical links.
flash memory Firmware memory for the current and previous version of library firmware.
get An activity in which a robot obtains a tape cartridge from a slot or tape drive.
GUI Graphical user interface. Software that enables the user to control the library environment through
visual screens.
HBA Host bus adapter. A circuit board residing in the host system that handles requests to and from
the host system and the library.
host One or more computers that generate and communicate data to the library.
hot-swappable The capability that enables a component to be replaced while power to the component is
maintained. This feature enables hardware maintenance actions and hardware upgrades to
proceed without disrupting subsystem availability.
HP (unit of Horizontal pitch. A measurement of the width of a chassis. Library circuit card assemblies sitting
measure) horizontally in card cages are measured vertically in these units where one HP is 5.08 mm (0.2
inches).
HP Enterprise An automated tape library composed of a:
Modular Library • Base module
E-Series
• Tape drive expansion module (optional)
• Card cage expansion module (optional)
import The process of placing a tape cartridge into the load port so that the robot can insert it into a
storage slot.
initialization A procedure that activates a machine reset, initiates wake-up diagnostics (from EPROMs) and
loads functional code.
interlock switch A switch that disconnects power to library mechanisms, excluding tape drives, when the center
door is opened.
inventory The process of reading and storing in memory the barcode identification and locations of all tape
cartridges in the library.
IPv4 IPv4 is an Internet Protocol that contains addressing information and some control information
that enables data to be routed in a network. IPv4 has an IP address size of 32 bits and is written
as four numbers separated by periods. An IPv4 address contains numerals only (0–255). A
sample IPv4 IP address looks like: 127.0.0.1.
IPv6 IPv6 is an Internet Protocol that contains addressing information and some control information
that enables data to be routed in a network. IPv6 has an IP address size of 128 bits and is in
hexadecimal format (base 16). An IPv6 address can contain numerals (0-9) and some letters (a-f).
A sample IPv6 address looks like: 3ffe:ffff:100:f101:210:a4ff:fee3:9566.
lift drive assembly A component of the robot that moves the table assembly vertically among the library modules.
lift drive pulley A component of the lift drive assembly used to move the table assembly vertically along the lift
pole to slots and tape drives.
lift pole The device that guides the vertical movement of the table assembly.
lift reduction gear The component of the lift drive assembly that controls the lift drive pulley.
lift suspension Four cables used to lift and lower the table assembly among the library modules.
cables
lift-flex cable The cable that carries control and power signals to the table assembly. This cable automatically
adjusts to the position of the table assembly in the library.
load port A device in the library that enables an operator to insert or remove tape cartridges during library
operations.
logical library A virtual representation of a physical library. Also called virtual library partition.
244 Glossary
magazine A removable array that holds tape cartridges and is placed into the load port.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect. The PCI bus typically runs at speeds of 33 MHz or 66 MHz
and is usually 32 bits wide. This means that it passes 32 bits of data simultaneously as if down
32 separate wires. Some of the most recent computers include wider 64-bit PCI buses, and already
certain very high-end video capture cards offer improved performance if connected to a 64-bit
PCI bus.
picker The portion of the picker assembly that grasps and holds a tape cartridge.
picker assembly A part of the library robot whose function is to grasp tape cartridges and move them between
slots and tape drives. A barcode scanner on the hand assembly reads tape cartridge volume
labels.
put An activity in which a robot places a tape cartridge into a slot or tape drive.
PWA Printed wiring assembly.
reach mechanism A component of the robot that moves the gripper to get or put a tape cartridge at a designated
location.
robot An electro-mechanical device that transports tape cartridges to and from locations in the library.
robotics unit The unit that includes the robotics components and that controls the movement of the robot between
slots, tape drives, and load ports.
RS-232C Short for Recommended Standard-232C, a standard interface approved by the Electronic Industries
Association (EIA) for connecting serial devices. This standard is for asynchronous transfer between
computer equipment and accessories. Data is transmitted bit by bit in a serial fashion. The RS-232
standard defines the function and use of all 25 pins of a DB-25 type connector.
slot The location in the library in which a tape cartridge is stored.
slot database The tape cartridge and slot records collected by the library inventory.
suspension cable One of four cables used to raise and lower the table.
table assembly A component of the robotics unit that carries the picker assembly vertically among the library
modules.
tape cartridge A container holding magnetic tape that can be processed without separating the tape from the
container. The library uses data and cleaning cartridges. These cartridges are not interchangeable.
tape drive An electromechanical device that moves magnetic tape and includes mechanisms for writing and
reading data to and from the tape.
tape drive An interface to control/monitor tape drive operation.
assembly
U A measure of chassis height. 1U in rack measurement is 44.45 mm (1.75 inches).
Circuit card assemblies using the cPCI standard use the Eurocard range of circuit card sizes,
where 3U cards are 100 x 160 mm (3.94 x 6.3 inches) and 6U cards are 230 x 160 mm (9.187
x 6.3 inches). The Interface Manager card is considered 4U wide with dimensions of 161.9 x
157.3 mm (6.4 x 6.2 inches).
World Wide Name A 64-bit integer that identifies a Fibre Channel port.
(WWN)
wrist A component of the hand assembly that rotates the hand horizontally.
245
Index
Symbols C
4U base module backplane board cable management feature, 15
description, 22 capacity expansion module, 17
removal and replacement, 207 capacity expansion module interconnect board
4U blank cover removal and replacement, 216
removal and replacement, 219 card cage center door, removal and replacement, 183
4U card cage backplane board, description, 23 card cage expansion module, 16
71e fan removal and replacement, 154
configuration, 9 power supply removal and replacement, 151
number of slots, 13 removal and replacement, 192
reserved slots, 26, 44 caster boss, 242
RoHS compliance, 121 center door interlock, 32
slot numbering, 27 change network settings, 43
upgrading, 15, 30 change password, 43
8U base module backplane board changing the master controller, 21
description, 21 cleaning
removal and replacement, 195 a drive, 45
8U expansion module faceplate, removal and replacement, CMO events, 105
188 command line interface, 21, 63
8U tape backplane board, removal and replacement, 211 command screen interface, 30
8U tape drive expansion module backplane board, Command View TL
description, 22 as diagnostic tool, 57
capacity upgrade license, 15, 30
A with Interface Manager card, 18, 19
activity codes, 233 CompactFlash
adapter panel, 15 removal and replacement, 136
adjust screen contrast, 44 CompactFlash memory card
align screen, 45 location, 15
removal, 132
B Component Status screen, 42
backplanes, 21 configuration
barcode labels barcode reporting formats, 44
configuring use, 32, 44 interface controller verification, 67
information tracked, 34 inventory mode, 32, 44
inventory speed, 33, 34, 44, 62 load ports, 43
ordering, 239 reserve slots, 44
placement, 34, 35 configuration events, 119
barcode reader Configuration screen, 43
failure, 60 Contact Information screen, 46
location, 14 contrast adjustment, 44
barcode reporting format, 44 conventions
base module document, 227
card cage, 15 text symbols, 227
description, 13 cPCI slots, 15, 21
base module backplane board, removal and replacement, customer reserved space, 13
195
base module center door, removal and replacement, 179 D
base module faceplate, removal and replacement, 184 devices, troubleshooting, 67
base module fans, removal and replacement, 152 DHCP, 43
base module load port door, removal and replacement, diagnostic events, 76
177 diagnostic support tools, 57
base module power supply, removal and replacement, Display Library Time screen, 46
149 documentation
Belarus Kazakhstan Russia EAC marking, 237 conventions, 227
HP website, 226
246 Index
related, 226 H
HBA device driver
E troubleshooting, 67
e2400--FC 4Gb interface controller verifying information, 67
depiction, 48 Health Summary screen, 42
e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller help
depiction, 20, 48 obtaining, 226
functional description, 20 Home screen, OCP, 38
LED indicators, 66 host configuration
master controller, 21 troubleshooting, 67
removal and replacement, 144 verifying, 67
troubleshooting, 66 host maps, 21
e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller HP
depiction, 20 technical support, 226
LED indicators, 66 HP Support Info screen, 46
removal and replacement, 146
troubleshooting, 66 I
EAC marking Identity Screen, 42
Belarus Kazakhstan Russia, 237 IFM events, 71
EML import/export slots, 14, 24, 26
network, 23 independent software vendors, 23
physical description, 9 installing
powering off, 32 redundant PDU, 241
powering on, 31 Interconnect board
environmental capacity expansion module, 216
events, 120 interconnect board
Event Log Type Selection screenlist, 43 tape drive expansion module, 215
event reporting, 68 Interface Manager card
events depiction, 18
CMO, 105 functional description, 18
configuration, 119 removal and replacement, 131
diagnostic, 76 troubleshooting, 63
environmental, 120 interlock, center door, 32
IFM, 71 internal network, 25, 50
library robotics controller, 69 inventory, 32
miscellaneous library, 94
robot, 95 L
scan, 103 labeling tape cartridges, 34
service, 93 leakage current, 241
SNMP, 92 LED fault isolation, 65
tape drive, 109 LED indicators
target, 104 interface controller, 66
expansion module center door, removal and replacement, Interface Manager card, 63
181 library
expansion module load port door, removal and description, 23
replacement, 178 floor, 14, 16, 26
expansion modules tape cartridges used, 24
capacity, 17 Library and Tape Tools (L&TT)
card cage, 16 as diagnostic tool, 57
tape drive, 16 description, 30
Extended Tape Library Architecture, 9 Library Configuration screen, 43
library robotics controller
F depiction, 18
FC connection, troubleshooting, 67 events, 69
FC port connection, verifying, 67 functional description, 18
floor removal and replacement, 129
at lowest module, 26 volatile memory, 24
library, 14, 16, 26 lift pole, 14, 54
lift suspension cable, 14, 54
247
lift table assembly, 14 O
lift-flex cable, 14, 54 OCP
lift-flex retraction handle, 14, 54 functions, 39
load port Home screen, 38
configuring, 43 icons, 37
functional description, 24 removal and replacement, 176
inserting tape cartridges, 36 tabs and status bar, 38
unlocking, 44 timeouts, 39
LTO troubleshooting, 60
slots, 26 OCP screens
technology, 24 Component Status, 42
LTO2 Configuration, 43
LED, 49 Event Log Type Selection, 43
part number, 157 Health Summary, 42
removal and replacement, 157 Identity, 42
LTO3 Library Configuration, 43
LED, 49 Operations, 44
part number, 157 Support, 46
removal and replacement, 157 View Library Inventory, 43
LTO4 open load port manually, 54
barcode label, 34 operating problems, 62
LEDs, 49 operation state codes, 232
part number, 158 operations, 45
removal and replacement, 158 Operations screen, 44
LTO5
barcode label, 34 P
LEDs, 50 parking the robot manually, 53
part number, 158 partitions, 21
removal and replacement, 158 password, changing, 43
LTO6 PDU
LEDs, 50 installing redundant, 241
part number, 158 requirements, 241
removal and replacement, 158 physical description, 9
picker assembly, 14, 54, 56
M power distribution unit
magazine LEDs, 53
depiction, 24 power off library, 32
functional description, 14, 24 power rating, PDU, 241
inserting cartridges, 36 power supply
inserting into load port, 37 autoranging, 14, 16
removal and replacement, 221 power supply in base module
management station, 19, 23, 29 LED, 52
manual operations power supply in card cage expansion module
opening the load port, 54 LEDs, 52
parking the robot, 53 power supply in tape drive expansion module
removing a tape cartridge, 56 LED, 52
memory module card powering on library, 31
removal and replacement, 143 prelabeled , ordering, 239
miscellaneous library events, 94 preparing tape cartridges, 34
moving
a tape, 45 R
rack stability
N warning, 228
network rail designations, 122, 126
internal, 25, 50 ratchet tool, 14, 54
numbering rebooting the library, 32, 44
library components, 41 redundant PDU, installing, 241
power supplies, 41 regulatory information, 237
slots, 26 Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 237
248 Index
Ukraine RoHS material content declaration, 237 base module, 28
related documentation, 226 base module 71e, 27
removal and replacement card cage expansion module, 29
4U base module backplane board, 207 scheme, 26
4U blank cover, 219 tape drive expansion module, 28
8U expansion module faceplate, 188 SNMP
8U tape backplane board, 211 events, 92
base module backplane board, 195 startup problems, 58
base module center door, 179 Status screen, 41
base module faceplate, 184 Subscriber's Choice, HP, 227
base module fans, 152 Support screen, 46
base module load port door, 177 support ticket, 58
base module power supply, 149 switch
capacity expansion module interconnect board, 216 LEDs, 50
card cage center door, 183 ports, 25
card cage expansion module, 192 symbols in text, 227
card cage expansion module fans, 154
card cage expansion module power supply, 151 T
CompactFlash, 136 table assembly, 14, 54
e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller, 144 tape cartridges
e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller, 146 ESD precautions, 34
expansion module center door, 181 labeling, 34
expansion module load port door, 178 used by library, 24
Interface Manager card, 131 WORM, 24
library robotics controller, 129 write-protect switch, 35
load port magazine, 221 tape drive, 34
memory module, 143 see also Ultrium tape drive
operator control panel, 176 tape drive events, 109
robotics unit, 166 tape drive expansion module, 16
robotics unit cover, 218 removal and replacement, 121, 129
six-slot array, 223 tape drive expansion module interconnect board
tape drive expansion module, 121, 129 removal and replacement, 215
tape drive expansion module interconnect board, 215 tape drive expansion module power supply, removal and
tape drive expansion module power supply, 149 replacement, 149
three-slot arrays, 222 tape inventory, 32
Ultrium tape drive, 156, 157, 158 target events, 104
removing a tape cartridge manually, 55, 56 TCP/IP, 23
reserve slots, configuring, 44 technical support
robot HP, 226
events, 95 Telnet session, 21, 23
not parked during initialization, 33 terminal configuration settings, 68
parked during initialization, 32 text symbols, 227
robotics unit three-slot arrays, removal and replacement, 222
description, 14 troubleshooting
removal and replacement, 166 basic Fibre Channel, 66
troubleshooting, 60 devices, verifying, 67
robotics unit cover, removal and replacement, 218 FC connection, verifying, 67
RS232 interface, 23 HBA device driver, verifying, 67
run admin tests, 45 host configuration, verifying, 67
interface controller, 66
S interface controller problems, 66
scan events, 103 Interface Manager card, 63
Secure Manager, 62, 67 OCP problems, 60
serial port configuration, verifying, 68 operating problems, 62
service robotics problems, 60
events, 93 startup problems, 58
Service Menu screen, 46 tape drive problems, 62
six-slot array, removal and replacement, 223 Turkey RoHS material content declaration, 237
slot numbering
249
U
Ukraine RoHS material content declaration, 237
Ultrium 1840 see LTO4
Ultrium tape drive
1840, 24
3280, 24
6650, 24
960, 24
Eject button, 55
removal and replacement, 156, 157, 158
unlock door, 44
unlock load ports, 44
using the OCP, 37
V
View Library Inventory screen, 43
W
warning
rack stability, 228
warranty information
HP Enterprise servers, 237
HP Networking products, 237
HP ProLiant and X86 Servers and Options, 237
HP Storage products, 237
web sites
Command View TL, 64
websites
HP, 226
HP Subscriber's Choice for Business, 227
product manuals, 226
WORM tape cartridges, 24
write-protect switch, tape cartridges, 35
250 Index

EML Service Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EML Service Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Enterprise Modular Library E-Series

HP Part Number: AH062-96015

71e1 base modulefield racked 12 71 0–5 0 1–4

103e1 base module factory 12 103 0–5 0–9 1–4

245e1 base module1 tape drive 24 245 0–15 0–9 1–8

348e1 base module2 tape drive 32 348 0–25 0–9 1–12

375e1 base module1 tape drive 32 375 0–25 0–9 1–8

442e1 base module3 tape drive 40 442 0–35 0–9 1–16

469e1 base module2 tape drive 40 469 0–35 0–9 1–12

505e1 base module1 tape drive 40 505 0–35 0–9 1–8

Figure 1 Front view of the library

1. Reserved space. If your library contains LTO4 or later 2. Base module

Figure 3 Robotics unit

1. Robotics unit 2. Lift-flex retraction handle

Figure 4 Base module card cage (LTO3 tape drives shown)

1. Base module card cage 2. Interface Manager card

Figure 5 Tape drive expansion module

1. Viewing windows 2. 10-Cartridge load port

Card cage expansion module

1. Viewing window 2. 4U blank cover

Capacity expansion module

Figure 7 Capacity expansion module

1. Viewing windows 2. 10-Cartridge load port

Figure 8 Ports on the library robotics controller

Interface Manager card

Figure 9 Ports on the Interface Manager card 342213–001 or 393531–001

Figure 10 Ports on the Interface Manager card 480240-001

Figure 11 Viewing IP connections from the Identity Screen

Figure 12 Viewing the Change Network Settings screen

NOTE: Some settings are read-only.

Ports on the e2400-FC 2Gb interface controller

1. FC ports to LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives 2. FC ports to hosts

Ports on the e2400-FC 4Gb interface controller

1. FC ports to LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives 2. FC ports to hosts

8U base module backplane

4U base module backplane

Tape drive expansion module backplane

Figure 15 Library network

1. Hosts 2. FC Switch (SAN)

Load ports and magazines

Figure 16 Library load ports on 40U configuration

Figure 17 Ports on the switch for the internal network

1. 10/100Base-TX RJ-45 ports

Operator control panel

Switch for the internal network 25

NOTE: Reserved slots are not available on the EML 71e.

1. Robot park zone 2. Array targets for the barcode scanner

1. Robot park zone 2. Array targets for the barcode scanner

Figure 21 Slot numbering in the tape drive expansion module

1. Slots available for data cartridges 2. Array targets

1. Slots available for data cartridges 2. Array targets

Figure 23 Slot numbering in the capacity expansion module

1. Slots available for data cartridges 2. Array targets

Library and Tape Tools

◦ New firmware files for connected devices

Powering on the library

Figure 24 Closing the center door

Figure 25 Library main power switch control

1. Library main power switch

Powering on the library 31

Powering off the library

When the robot is parked

32 Using the library

When the robot is not parked